Toyota 2012 Camry Hybrid Owners Manual

2015-09-07

: Toyota Toyota-2012-Camry-Hybrid-Owners-Manual-763027 toyota-2012-camry-hybrid-owners-manual-763027 toyota pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 497

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Abbreviation list

Abbreviation/Acronym list
ABBREVIATIONS
A/C

Air Conditioning

ABS

Anti-lock Brake System

ACC

Accessory

ALR

Automatic Locking Retractor

BSM

Blind Spot Monitor

CRS

Child Restraint System

DISP

Display

ECU

Electronic Control Unit

EDR

Event Data Recorder

ELR

Emergency Locking Retractor

EPS

Electric Power Steering

GAWR

Gross Axle Weight Ratings

GVWR

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

I/M
LATCH
LED

520

MEANING

Emission inspection and maintenance
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
Light Emitting Diode

M+S

Mud and Snow

MMT

Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl

MTBE

Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether

OBD

On Board Diagnostics

SRS

Supplemental Restraint System

TIN

Tire Identification Number

TPMS

Tire Pressure Warning System

TRAC

Traction Control

VIN

Vehicle Identification Number

VSC

Vehicle Stability Control

For your information
Main Owner’s Manual
Please note that this manual covers all models and all equipment, including
options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not
installed on your vehicle.
All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing.
However, because of the Toyota policy of continual product improvement, we
reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.
Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustrations may differ
from your vehicle in terms of equipment.

Noise from under vehicle after turning off the hybrid system
Approximately five hours after the hybrid system is turned off, you may hear
sound coming from under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound
of a fuel evaporation leakage check and, it does not indicate a malfunction.

Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Toyota
A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Toyota
vehicles are currently available on the market. You should know that Toyota
does not warrant these products and is not responsible for their
performance, repair, or replacement, or for any damage they may cause to,
or adverse effect they may have on, your Toyota vehicle.
This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Toyota products.
Modification with non-genuine Toyota products could affect its performance,
safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In
addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification
may not be covered under warranty.

Installation of a mobile two-way radio system
The installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could affect
electronic systems such as:
● Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system
● Cruise control system
● Anti-lock brake system
● SRS airbag system
● Seat belt pretensioner system
Be sure to check with your Toyota dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions regarding installation of a mobile two-way radio system.
High voltage parts and cables on the hybrid vehicles emit approximately the
same amount of electromagnetic waves as the conventional gasoline powered vehicles or home electronic appliances despite of their electromagnetic
shielding.
Unwanted noise may occur in the reception of the mobile two-way radio.

Vehicle data recordings
Your Toyota is equipped with several sophisticated computers that will record
certain data, such as:
• Engine speed
• Electric motor speed (traction motor speed)
• Accelerator status
• Brake status
• Vehicle speed
• Shift position
• Hybrid battery (traction battery) status
The recorded data varies according to the vehicle grade level and options
with which it is equipped. Furthermore, these computers do not record conversations, sounds or pictures.
● Data usage
Toyota may use the data recorded in these computers to diagnose malfunctions, conduct research and development, and improve quality.
Toyota will not disclose the recorded data to a third party except:
• With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the lessee if
the vehicle is leased
• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government agency
• For use by Toyota in a law suit
• For research purposes where the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or
vehicle owner
● Usage of data collected through Safety Connect (U.S.mainland only)
If your Toyota has Safety Connect and if you have subscribed to those services, please refer to the Safety Connect Telematics Subscription Service
Agreement for information on data collected and its usage.

Event data recorder
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations,
such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed
to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake
pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine
the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access
to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer,
other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can
read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

● Disclosure of the EDR data
Toyota will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except
when:
• An agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the lessee for a leased vehicle)
is obtained
• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government agency
• For use by Toyota in a law suit
However, if necessary, Toyota may:
• Use the data for research on vehicle safety performance
• Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing
information about the specific vehicle or vehicle owner

Scrapping of your Toyota
The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Toyota contain
explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt
pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be
sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner
removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Toyota
dealer before you scrap your vehicle.

Perchlorate Material
Special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These components may include airbag, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote control batteries.

CAUTION
■ General precautions while driving
Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influence of alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehicle. Alcohol and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and
reduce coordination, which could lead to an accident that could result in
death or serious injury.
Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other
drivers or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.
Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that distracts the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or
reading can result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you,
your occupants or others.
■ General precaution regarding children’s safety
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to
have or use the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral.
There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with
the windows, the moon roof, or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat
build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to
children.
■ Disposal of the hybrid battery (traction battery)
If your vehicle is disposed of without the hybrid battery having been
removed, there is a danger of serious electric shock if high voltage parts,
cables and their connectors are touched. In the event that your vehicle must
be disposed of, the hybrid battery must be disposed of by your Toyota dealer
or a qualified service shop. If the hybrid battery is not disposed of properly, it
may cause electric shock that can result in death or serious injury.

Symbols used throughout this manual
Cautions & Notices
CAUTION
This is a warning against something which, if ignored, may cause death or
serious injury to people. You are informed about what you must or must not do
in order to reduce the risk of death or serious injury to yourself and others.

NOTICE
This is a warning against something which, if ignored, may cause damage to
the vehicle or its equipment. You are informed about what you must or must
not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your Toyota and its
equipment.

Symbols used in illustrations
Safety symbol
The symbol of a circle with a slash through it means “Do not”, “Do
not do this”, or “Do not let this happen”.

Arrows indicating operations
Indicates the action (pushing, turning,
etc.) used to operate switches and other
devices.
Indicates the outcome of an operation
(e.g. a lid opens).

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Before driving

Information on the hybrid system and adjusting and
operating features such as door locks, mirrors, and
steering column.

When driving

Driving, stopping and safe-driving information.

Interior features

Air conditioning and audio systems, as well as other interior features for a comfortable driving experience.

Maintenance
and care

Cleaning and protecting your vehicle, performing do-ityourself maintenance, and maintenance information.

When trouble
arises

What to do if the vehicle needs to be towed, gets a flat
tire, or is involved in an accident.

Vehicle
specifications

Detailed vehicle information.

For owners

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners, and seat belt
and SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners

Index

Alphabetical listing of information contained in this
manual.

1-1. Hybrid system

Hybrid system
Your vehicle is a hybrid vehicle. It has characteristics different from
conventional vehicles. Be sure you are closely familiar with the characteristics of your vehicle, and operate with care.
The hybrid system combines the use of a gasoline engine and an
electric motor (traction motor) according to driving conditions,
improving fuel efficiency and reducing exhaust emissions.

Gasoline engine
Electric motor (traction motor)
■ When stopped/during take-off
The gasoline engine stops when the vehicle is stopped. During
start-off, the electric motor (traction motor) drives the vehicle. At
slow speeds or when traveling down a gentle slope, the engine
is stopped and the motor is used.

1-1. Hybrid system

■ During normal driving
The gasoline engine is predominantly used. The electric motor
(traction motor) charges the hybrid battery as necessary.
1

■ When accelerating sharply

Before driving

The power of the hybrid battery (traction battery) is added to that
of the gasoline engine via the electric motor (traction motor).
■ When braking (regenerative braking)
The electric motor (traction motor) charges the hybrid battery
(traction battery).

Vehicle Proximity Notification System
When the gasoline engine is off while driving, a sound is produced to
warn pedestrians, people riding bicycles or other people and vehicles
in the surrounding area that the vehicle is approaching. The pitch of
the sound adjusts according to vehicle speed. When vehicle speed is
approximately 16 mph (25 km/h) or more, the warning system turns
off.

1-1. Hybrid system

■ Regenerative braking
In the following situations, kinetic energy is converted to electric energy and
deceleration force can be obtained in conjunction with the recharging of the
hybrid battery (traction battery).
● The accelerator pedal is released.
● The brake pedal is depressed with the shift lever in D or B.
■ EV indicator
The EV indicator comes on when driving
the vehicle using only the electric motor
(traction motor).

■ Conditions in which the gasoline engine may not stop
The gasoline engine starts and stops automatically. However, it may not stop
automatically in the following conditions:
● During gasoline engine warm-up
● During hybrid battery (traction battery) charging
● When the temperature of the hybrid battery (traction battery) is high or
low
● When the heater is switched on

1-1. Hybrid system

■ Charging the hybrid battery (traction battery)

● If the shift lever is in N, the hybrid battery (traction battery) will not be
charged. Always put the shift lever in P when the vehicle is stopped.
When driving in heavy traffic, operate the vehicle with the shift lever in D
or B to avoid discharging the battery.
■ Charging the 12-volt battery
→P. 463
■ After the 12-volt battery has discharged or has been changed or
removed
The gasoline engine may not stop even if the vehicle is running on the hybrid
battery (traction battery). If this continues for a few days, contact your Toyota
dealer.

Before driving

● As the gasoline engine charges the hybrid battery (traction battery), the
battery does not need to be charged from an outside source. However, if
the vehicle is left parked for a long time the hybrid battery will slowly discharge. For this reason, be sure to drive the vehicle at least once every
few months for at least 30 minutes or 10 miles (16 km). If the hybrid battery becomes fully discharged and you are unable to jump-start the vehicle with the 12-volt battery, contact your Toyota dealer.

1-1. Hybrid system

■ Sounds and vibrations specific to a hybrid vehicle
There may be no engine sounds or vibration even though the vehicle is able
to move. Always shift the shift lever to P when parked.
The following sounds or vibrations may occur when the hybrid system is
operating and are not a malfunction:
● Motor sounds may be heard from the engine compartment.
● Sounds may be heard from the hybrid battery (traction battery) behind
the rear seats when the hybrid system starts or stops.
● Sounds from the hybrid system may be heard when the trunk lid is open.
● Sounds may be heard from the transmission when the hybrid system
starts or stops.
● Engine sounds may be heard when accelerating sharply.
● Sounds may be heard due to regenerative braking when the brake pedal
is depressed.
● Vibration may be felt when the gasoline engine starts or stops.
● Cooling fan sounds may be heard from the air intake vent beside the rear
left seat.
■ Vehicle Proximity Notification System
In the following cases, the Vehicle Proximity Notification System sound may
be difficult for pedestrians, people riding bicycles or other people and vehicles in the surrounding area to hear:
● When there is a lot of noise in the vicinity
● When it is raining or during strong winds
● When in the area surrounding the rear of the vehicle, rather than in front
of the vehicle
■ Maintenance, repair, recycling, and disposal
Contact your Toyota dealer regarding maintenance, repair, recycling and disposal. Do not dispose of the vehicle yourself.

1-1. Hybrid system

Hybrid system precautions
Take care when handling the hybrid system, as it contains a high
voltage system (about 650V at maximum) as well as parts that
become extremely hot when the hybrid system is operating. Obey
the caution labels attached to the vehicle.

Before driving

Air conditioning compressor

Service plug

Power control unit with DC/
DC converter

Electric
motor)

High voltage cables (orange)

Caution label

motor

(traction

Hybrid battery (traction battery)

1-1. Hybrid system

Hybrid battery air vent
There is an air intake vent beside
the rear left seat for the purpose
of cooling the hybrid battery
(traction battery). If the vent
becomes blocked, the hybrid
battery may overheat, leading to
a reduction in hybrid battery output.
Emergency shut off system
When a certain level of impact is detected by the impact sensor, the
emergency shut off system blocks off the high voltage current and
stops the fuel pump to minimize the risk of electrocution and fuel
leakage. If the emergency shut off system activates, your vehicle will
not restart. To restart the hybrid system, contact your Toyota dealer.
Hybrid warning message
A message is automatically displayed when a malfunction occurs in
the hybrid system or an improper operation is attempted.
If a warning message is shown
on the multi-information display,
read the message and follow the
instructions. (→P. 423)

1-1. Hybrid system

■ If a warning light comes on, a warning message is displayed, or the 12volt battery has been disconnected
The hybrid system may not start. In that case, try to start the system again. If
the “READY” indicator does not come on, contact your Toyota dealer.

■ Running out of fuel

■ Electromagnetic waves
● High voltage parts and cables on the hybrid vehicles incorporate electromagnetic shielding, and therefore emit approximately the same amount
of electromagnetic waves as conventional gasoline powered vehicles or
home electronic appliances.
● Your vehicle may cause sound interference in some third party-produced
radio parts.
■ Hybrid battery (traction battery)
The hybrid battery (traction battery) has a limited service life. The lifespan of
the hybrid battery (traction battery) can change in accordance with driving
style and driving conditions.

Before driving

When the vehicle has run out of fuel and the hybrid system cannot be
started, refuel the vehicle with at least enough gasoline to make the low fuel
level warning light (→P. 416) go off. If there is only a small amount of fuel,
the hybrid system may not be able to start. (The minimum amount of fuel to
add to make the low fuel level warning light go out is about 3.0 gal. [11.3 L,
2.5 Imp. gal] when the vehicle is on a level surface. This value may vary
when the vehicle is on a slope.)

1-1. Hybrid system

CAUTION
■ High voltage precautions
The vehicle has high voltage DC and AC systems as well as a 12-volt system. DC and AC high voltage is very dangerous and can cause severe burns
and electric shock that may result in death or serious injury.
● Never touch, disassemble, remove or replace the high voltage parts,
cables or their connectors.
● The hybrid system will become hot after starting as the system uses high
voltage. Be careful of both the high voltage and the high temperature, and
always obey the caution labels attached to the vehicle.
● Never try to open the service plug
access hole located in the luggage
compartment. The service plug is used
only when the vehicle is serviced and is
subject to high voltage.

1-1. Hybrid system

CAUTION
■ Road accident cautions
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of death or serious
injury:

● Do not touch the high voltage parts, cables or connectors.
● If electric wires are exposed inside or outside your vehicle, an electric
shock may occur. Never touch exposed electric wires.
● If a fluid leak occurs, do not touch the fluid as it may be strong alkaline
electrolyte from the hybrid battery (traction battery). If it comes into contact
with your skin or eyes, wash it off immediately with a large amount of water
or, if possible, boric acid solution. Seek immediate medical attention.
● If a fire occurs in the hybrid vehicle, leave the vehicle as soon as possible.
Never use a fire extinguisher that is not meant for electric fires. Using even
a small amount of water may be dangerous.
● If your vehicle needs to be towed, do so with the front wheels raised. If the
wheels connected to the electric motor (traction motor) are on the ground
when towing, the motor may continue to generate electricity. This may
cause a fire. (→P. 409)
● Carefully inspect the ground under the vehicle. If you find that liquid has
leaked onto the ground, the fuel system may have been damaged. Leave
the vehicle as soon as possible.
■ Nickel-metal hydride battery
Your vehicle contains a sealed nickel-metal hydride battery. If disposed of
improperly, it is hazardous to the environment and there is a risk of severe
burns and electrical shock that may result in death or serious injury.
■ Emergency shut off system
● Carefully check to see if there are exposed high voltage parts or cables.
Never touch the parts or cables. (→P. 33)
● Carefully inspect the ground under the vehicle. If you find that liquid has
leaked onto the ground, the fuel system may have been damaged. Leave
the vehicle as soon as possible.

Before driving

● Pull your vehicle off the road, shift the shift lever to P, apply the parking
brake, and turn the hybrid system off.

1-1. Hybrid system

NOTICE
■ Hybrid battery air vent
● Do not place foreign objects over or in front of the air vent. The hybrid battery (traction battery) may overheat and be damaged.
● Clean the air vent regularly to prevent the hybrid battery (traction battery)
from overheating.
● Do not wet the air vent as this may cause a short circuit and damage the
hybrid battery (traction battery).
● Do not carry large amounts of water such as water cooler bottles in the
vehicle. If water spills onto the hybrid battery (traction battery), the battery
may be damaged.

1-1. Hybrid system

Energy monitor/consumption screen
You can view the status of your hybrid system on the multi-information display and the navigation system or Display Audio system.

Navigation
system
(if
equipped) or Display Audio
system (if equipped)

Before driving

Multi-information display

Energy monitor
Navigation system (if equipped)
STEP 1

Press “INFO APPS”.

STEP 2

Touch “Fuel Consumption” on
the “Information” screen.
If the “Trip Information” or “Past
Record” screen is displayed,
touch “Energy”.

1-1. Hybrid system

Display Audio system (if equipped)
Press “CAR”.
If the “Trip Information” or “Past
Record” screen is displayed,
touch “Energy”.

Multi-information display
Push the “DISP” switch on the
steering wheel several times to
select the energy monitor display. (→P. 185)

Navigation system or
Display Audio system
Navigation system

When the vehicle is powered
by the electric
motor (traction
motor)

Display Audio system

Multi-information
display

1-1. Hybrid system

Navigation system or
Display Audio system

Multi-information
display

Navigation system
1

Before driving

When the vehicle is powered
by the gasoline
engine

Display Audio system

Navigation system

When the vehicle is powered
by both the gasoline engine and
the electric
motor (traction
motor)

Display Audio system

1-1. Hybrid system

Navigation system or
Display Audio system
Navigation system

When the vehicle is charging
the hybrid battery (traction
battery)

Display Audio system

Navigation system

When there is
no energy flow

Display Audio system

Multi-information
display

1-1. Hybrid system

Navigation system or
Display Audio system

Multi-information
display

Navigation system
1

Low

Full

Display Audio system

Low

Before driving

Hybrid battery
(traction battery) status

Full

1-1. Hybrid system

Trip Information screen (Navigation system or Display Audio
system)
Navigation system
STEP 1

Press “INFO APPS”. (→P. 39)

STEP 2

Touch “Fuel Consumption” on the information screen.

STEP 3

If “Energy Monitor” screen is displayed, touch “Fuel Consumption”.
If “Past Record” screen is displayed, touch “Trip Information”.

Fuel consumption in the past
15 minutes
Displays the average vehicle
speed since the hybrid system
was started.
Displays the elapsed time
since the hybrid system was
started.
Cruising range
Regenerated energy in the
past 15 minutes
One symbol indicates 50 Wh.
Up to 5 symbols are shown.
The image is example only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.

1-1. Hybrid system

Display Audio system
Press “CAR”. (→P. 39)
If the “Energy Monitor” or “Past Record” screen is displayed, touch “Trip
Information”.

Displays the average vehicle
speed since the hybrid system
was started.
Displays the elapsed time
since the hybrid system was
started.
Cruising range
Regenerated energy in the
past 15 minutes
One symbol indicates 30 Wh.
Up to 5 symbols are shown.
The image is example only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.

Before driving

Fuel consumption in the past
15 minutes

1-1. Hybrid system

Past record screen (Navigation system or Display Audio system)
Navigation system
STEP 1

Press “INFO APPS”. (→P. 39)

STEP 2

Touch “Fuel Consumption” on the information screen.

STEP 3

If “Energy Monitor” screen is displayed, touch “Fuel Consumption”.
If “Trip Information” screen is displayed, touch “Past Record”.

Best past fuel consumption
Update
The average fuel consumption
and graph are updated, and a
new average fuel consumption
record begins.

Average fuel consumption
Displays a maximum of five past
record of the average fuel consumption.
The image is example only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.

1-1. Hybrid system

Display Audio system
Press “CAR”. (→P. 39)
If the “Energy Monitor” or “Trip Information” screen is displayed, touch
“Past Record”.
1

Best past fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption
and graph are updated, and a
new average fuel consumption
record begins.

Average fuel consumption
Displays a maximum of five past
record of the average fuel consumption.
The image is example only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.
■ Resetting the consumption data
Selecting “Clear” on the “Trip Information” screen will reset the fuel consumption and the regenerated energy for the past 15 minutes. Selecting
“Clear” on the “Past Record” screen will reset the past records and best past
fuel consumption. Selecting “Yes” on the following screen will confirm resetting of all the data.

Before driving

Update

1-1. Hybrid system

Hybrid vehicle driving tips
For economical and ecological driving, pay attention to the following
points:

■ Using Eco drive mode
(→P. 170)

■ Use of the Hybrid System Indicator
More Eco-friendly driving is possible by keeping the Hybrid System
Indicator needle within the Eco area.

■ When braking the vehicle
Make sure to operate the brakes gently and in good time. A greater
amount of electrical energy can be retained when slowing down.

■ Delays
Repeated acceleration and deceleration, as well as long waits at traffic
lights, will lead to bad fuel consumption. Check traffic reports before
leaving and avoid delays as much as possible. When encountering a
delay, gently release the brake pedal to allow the vehicle to move forward slightly while avoiding overuse of the accelerator pedal. Doing so
can help control excessive gasoline consumption.

■ Highway driving
Control your speed and keep at a constant speed. Also, before stopping at a toll booth or similar, allow plenty of time to release the accelerator and gently apply the brakes. A greater amount of electrical energy
can be retained when slowing down.

■ Air conditioning
Use the air conditioning only when necessary. Doing so can help control excessive gasoline consumption.
In summer: In high temperatures, use the recirculated air mode. Doing
so will help to reduce the burden on the air conditioning and reduce fuel
consumption as well.
In winter: Because the gasoline engine will not automatically cut out
until the gasoline engine and the interior of the vehicle are warm, it will
consume fuel. Also, fuel consumption can be improved by avoiding
overuse of the heater.

1-1. Hybrid system

■ Checking tire inflation pressure
Make sure to check the tire inflation pressure frequently. Improper tire
inflation pressure can cause poor fuel consumption.
Also, as snow tires can cause large amounts of friction, their use on dry
roads can lead to poor fuel consumption. Use a tire that is appropriate
for the season.

Before driving

■ Luggage
Carrying heavy luggage can lead to poor fuel consumption. Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage. Installing a large roof rack can also cause
poor fuel consumption.

■ Warming up before driving
Since the gasoline engine starts up and cuts out automatically when
cold, warming up the engine is unnecessary. Moreover, frequently driving short distances will cause the engine to repeatedly warm up, which
can lead to poor fuel consumption.

1-2. Key information

Keys
The following keys are provided with the vehicle.

Electronic keys
• Operating the smart key
system (→P. 53)
• Operating the wireless
remote control function
(→P. 66)

Mechanical keys
Key number plate

Using the mechanical key
To take out the mechanical key,
push the release button and take
the key out.
The mechanical key can only be
inserted in one direction, as the
key only has grooves on one
side. If the key cannot be inserted
in a lock cylinder, turn it over and
re-attempt to insert it.
After using the mechanical key,
store it in the electronic key. Carry
the mechanical key together with
the electronic key. If the electronic
key battery is depleted or the
entry function does not operate
properly, you will need the
mechanical key. (→P. 458)

1-2. Key information

■ When required to leave the vehicle’s key with a parking attendant
Lock the glove box as circumstances demand. (→P. 290)
Remove the mechanical key for your own use and provide the attendant with
the electronic key only.

■ Key number plate

■ When riding in an aircraft
When bringing a key with wireless remote control function onto an aircraft,
make sure you do not press any buttons on the key while inside the aircraft
cabin. If you are carrying the key in your bag etc., ensure that the buttons
are not likely to be pressed accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the
key to emit radio waves that could interfere with the operation of the aircraft.

NOTICE
■ To prevent key damage
Observe the following:
● Do not drop the keys, subject them to strong shocks or bend them.
● Do not expose the keys to high temperatures for long periods of time.
● Do not get the keys wet or wash them in an ultrasonic washer etc.
● Do not attach metallic or magnetic materials to the keys or place the keys
close to such materials.
● Do not disassemble the keys.
● Do not attach a sticker or anything else to the surface of the key.
● Do not place the keys near objects that produce magnetic fields, such as
TVs, audio systems and glass top ranges, or medical electrical equipment,
such as low-frequency therapy equipment.

Before driving

Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle. In the
event that a mechanical key is lost, a new key can be made at your Toyota
dealer using the key number plate. (→P. 457)

1-2. Key information

NOTICE
■ Carrying the electronic key on your person
Carry the electronic key 3.9 in. (10 cm) or more away from electric appliances that are turned on. Radio waves emitted from electric appliances
within 3.9 in. (10 cm) of the electronic key may interfere with the key, causing
the key to not function properly.
■ In case of a smart key system malfunction or other key-related problems
Take your vehicle with all the electronic keys provided with your vehicle to
your Toyota dealer.
■ When a vehicle key is lost
If the key remains lost, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly. Visit
your Toyota dealer immediately with all remaining electronic keys that was
provided with your vehicle.

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Smart key system
The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the
electronic key on your person, for example in your pocket.
(The driver should always carry the electronic key.)
1

Before driving

Electronic key

Unlocks and locks the doors (→P. 54)
Unlocks the trunk (→P. 54)
Starts the hybrid system (→P. 159)

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Unlocking and locking the doors (front door handles only)
Grip the driver’s door handle to
unlock the door.* (Grip the passenger’s door handle to unlock
all doors.)
Make sure to touch the sensor on
the back of the handle.
The doors cannot be unlocked for
3 seconds after the doors are
locked.
*: The door unlock settings can be
changed. (→P. 58)

Touch the lock sensor (the
indentation on the side of the
door handle) to lock the doors.

Unlocking the trunk
Press the button to unlock the
trunk.

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Antenna location and effective range
■ Antenna location
Antennas outside the cabin

Antenna outside the trunk

Before driving

Antenna inside the trunk
Antennas inside the cabin

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

■ Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is
detected)
When locking or unlocking
the doors
The system can be operated
when the electronic key is
within about 2.3 ft. (0.7 m) of
either of the front outside
door handles. (Only the
doors detecting the key can
be operated.)

When unlocking the trunk
The system can be operated
when the electronic key is
within about 2.3 ft. (0.7 m) of
the trunk release button.

When starting the hybrid
system
or
changing
“POWER” switch modes
The system can be operated
when the electronic key is
inside the vehicle.
■ Operation signals
Doors: A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that
the doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)
Trunk: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the trunk has been unlocked.

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

■ When the door cannot be locked by the lock sensor
Use your palm to touch the lock sensor.

A combination of exterior and interior alarms as well as warning messages
shown on the multi-information display is used to prevent theft of the vehicle
and accidents resulting from erroneous operation. Take appropriate measures in response to any warning message on the multi-information display.
(→P. 433)
The following table describes circumstances and correction procedures
when only alarms are sounded.
Alarm

Exterior alarm
sounds once for
5 seconds

Interior alarm
sounds continuously

Situation

Correction procedure

The trunk was closed while
the electronic key was still
inside the trunk and all the
doors were locked.

Retrieve the electronic key from the
trunk and close the
trunk lid.

An attempt was made to
lock the vehicle while a
door was open.

Close all of the doors
and lock the doors
again.

The “POWER” switch was
turned to ACCESSORY
mode while the driver’s
door was open (or the
driver’s door was opened
while the “POWER” switch
was in ACCESSORY
mode).

Turn the “POWER”
switch off and close
the driver’s door.

Before driving

■ Alarms and warning indicators

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

■ Security feature
If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is
unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again. (However, depending on the location of the electronic key, the key may be
detected as being in the vehicle. In this case, vehicle may be unlocked.)
■ Switching the door unlock function
It is possible to set which doors the entry function unlocks using the wireless
remote control.
STEP 1 Turn the “POWER” switch off.
STEP 2 When the indicator light on the key surface is not on, press and

hold
holding

, or

for about 5 seconds while pressing and

The setting changes each time an operation is performed, as shown below.
(When changing the setting continuously, release the buttons, wait for at
least 5 seconds, and repeat step 2.)
Multi-information
display

Unlocking doors
Holding the driver's door
handle unlocks only the
driver's door.
Holding the front passenger’s door handle unlocks
all the doors.
Holding either front door
handle unlocks all the
doors.

Beep

Exterior: Beeps 3
times
Interior: Beeps once

Exterior: Beeps twice
Interior: Beeps once

Vehicles with an alarm system: To prevent unintended triggering of the
alarm, unlock the doors using the wireless remote control and open and
close a door once after the settings have been changed. (If a door is not
opened within 60 seconds after
is pressed, the doors will be locked
again and the alarm will automatically be set.)
In case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm. (→P. 110)

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

■ Battery-saving function
The battery-saving function will be activated in order to prevent the electronic key battery and the 12-volt battery from being discharged while the
vehicle is not in operation for a long time.
● In the following situations, the smart key system may take some time to
unlock the doors.

• The electronic key has been left in an area of approximately 6 ft. (2 m)
of the outside of the vehicle for 10 minutes or longer.
• The smart key system has not been used for 5 days or longer.
● If the smart key system has not been used for 14 days or longer, the
doors cannot be unlocked at any doors except the driver’s door. In this
case, take hold of the driver’s door handle, or use the wireless remote
control or the mechanical key, to unlock the doors.

Before driving

■ Electronic Key Battery-Saving Function
When battery-saving mode is set, battery depletion is minimized by stopping
the electronic key from emitting radio waves.
Press

twice while pressing and

holding
. Confirm that the electronic
key indicator flashes 4 times.
While the battery-saving mode is set, the
smart key system cannot be used. To
cancel the function, press any of the electronic key buttons.

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

■ Conditions affecting operation
The smart key system uses weak radio waves. In the following situations,
the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle may be
affected, preventing the smart key system, wireless remote control and
engine immobilizer system from operating properly.
(Ways of coping: →P. 458)
● When the electronic key battery is depleted
● Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise
● When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following
metallic objects
• Cards to which aluminum foil is attached
• Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside
• Metallic wallets or bags
• Coins
• Hand warmers made of metal
• Media such as CDs and DVDs
● When other wireless key (that emit radio waves) is being used nearby
● When carrying the electronic key together with the following devices that
emit radio waves
• A portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless communication device
• Another vehicle’s electronic key or a wireless key that emits radio
waves
• Personal computers or personal digital assistants (PDAs)
• Digital audio players
• Portable game systems
● If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to
the rear window
● When the electronic key is placed near a battery charger or electronic
devices

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

■ Notes for the entry function
● Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection
areas), the system may not operate properly in the following cases:

● As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may
be locked or unlocked by anyone.
● Even if the electronic key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possible to
start the hybrid system if the electronic key is near the window.
● The doors may unlock if a large amount of water splashes on the door
handle, such as in the rain or in a car wash when the electronic key is
within the effective range. (The door will automatically be locked after
approximately 60 seconds if the doors are not opened and closed.)
● Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the door.
● If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the electronic key is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not
be unlocked by the entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to
unlock the doors.)
● A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle may prevent the
doors from being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the
original position and check that the doors unlock before pulling the door
handle again.

Before driving

• The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle,
near the ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or
unlocked.
• The electronic key is near the ground or in a high place, or too close to
the rear bumper center when the trunk is unlocked.
• The electronic key is on the instrument panel, rear package tray or
floor, or in the door pockets or glove box when the hybrid system is
started or “POWER” switch modes are changed.
● Do not leave the electronic key on top of the instrument panel or near the
door pockets when exiting the vehicle. Depending on the radio wave
reception conditions, it may be detected by the antenna outside the cabin
and the door will become lockable from the outside, possibly trapping the
electronic key inside the vehicle.

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

■ Notes for locking the doors
● Touching the door lock sensor while wearing gloves may delay or prevent
lock operation. Remove the gloves and touch the lock sensor again.
● When the lock operation is performed using the lock sensor, recognition
signals will be shown up to two consecutive times. After this, no recognition signals will be given.
● If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the
effective range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In that case,
follow the following correction procedures to wash the vehicle:
• Place the electronic key in a location 6 ft. (2 m) or more away from the
vehicle. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)
• Set the electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart key
system. (→P. 59)
● If the electronic key is inside the vehicle and a door handle becomes wet
during a car wash, a message may be shown on the multi-information
display and a buzzer will sound outside the vehicle. To turn off the alarm,
lock all the doors.
● The lock sensor may not work properly if it comes into contact with ice,
snow, mud, etc. Clean the lock sensor and attempt to operate it again.
■ Notes for the unlocking function
● A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle may prevent the
doors from being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the
original position and check that the doors unlock before pulling the door
handle again.
● Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the door.
Remove the gloves and touch the sensor on the back of the handle
again.
● If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the
effective range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In that case,
follow the following correction procedures to wash the vehicle:
• Place the electronic key in a location 6 ft. (2 m) or more away from the
vehicle. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)
• Set the electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart key
system. (→P. 59)
● If there is another electronic key in the detection area, it may take slightly
longer to unlock the doors after the door handle is gripped.

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

■ When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods
● To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 6 ft.
(2 m) of the vehicle.
● The smart key system can be deactivated in advance. (→P. 498)

■ Alarm (if equipped)

■ To operate the system properly
Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get
the electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from
the outside of the vehicle.
Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the
key may not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly.
(The alarm may go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention function may
not operate.)
■ If the smart key system does not operate properly
● Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the mechanical key. (→P. 458)
● Starting the hybrid system: →P. 458
■ Electronic key battery depletion
● The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years.
● If the battery becomes low, an alarm will sound in the cabin when the
hybrid system stops. (→P. 433)
● As the electronic key always receives radio waves, the battery will
become depleted even if the electronic key is not used. The following
symptoms indicate that the electronic key battery may be depleted.
Replace the battery when necessary. (→P. 382)
• The smart key system or the wireless remote control does not operate.
• The detection area becomes smaller.
• The LED indicator on the key surface does not turn on.

Before driving

Using the smart key system to lock the doors will set the alarm system.
(→P. 110)

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

● To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 3 ft.
(1 m) of the following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field:
•
•
•
•
•
•

TVs
Personal computers
Cellular phones, cordless phones and battery chargers
Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones
Glass top ranges
Table lamps

■ When the electronic key battery is fully depleted
→P. 382
■ If the smart key system has been deactivated in a customized setting
● Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the wireless remote control or
mechanical key. (→P. 66, 458)
● Starting the hybrid system and changing “POWER” switch modes:
→P. 459
● Stopping the hybrid system: →P. 159
■ Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e. g. smart key system) can be changed.
(Customizable features: →P. 498)
■ Certification for the smart key system
U.S.A.
FCC ID: NI4TMLF10-4
FCC ID: NI4TMLF10-5
FCC ID: HYQ23AAB
FCC ID: HYQ14FBA
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

■ Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
● People with implanted pacemakers or cardiac defibrillators should keep
away from the smart key system antennas. (→P. 55)
The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary,
the entry function can be disabled. Ask your Toyota dealer for details, such
as the frequency of radio waves and timing of emitting the radio waves.
Then, consult your doctor to see if you should disable the entry function.
● Users of any electrical medical device other than implanted pacemakers
and implanted cardiac defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the
device for information about its operation under the influence of radio
waves.
Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such
medical devices.
Ask your Toyota dealer for details for disabling the entry function.

Before driving

CAUTION

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Wireless remote control
The wireless remote control can be used to lock and unlock the vehicle.

Locks all the doors
Unlocks all the doors
Pressing the button unlocks
the driver’s door. Pressing the
button again within 5 seconds
unlocks the other doors.

Opens the driver’s window
and moon roof (press and
hold)*
Unlocks the trunk
(press and hold)
Sounds the alarm
(press and hold)

*: This

setting must be customized at your Toyota dealer.

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

■ Operation signals
Doors: A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that
the doors have been locked/unlocked.
(Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)

Trunk: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the trunk has been unlocked.

■ Door lock buzzer
If an attempt to lock the doors is made when a door is not fully closed, a
buzzer sounds continuously. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock
the vehicle once more.
■ Panic mode
When
is pressed for longer
than about one second, an alarm will
sound intermittently and the vehicle
lights will flash to deter any person from
trying to break into or damage your
vehicle.
To stop the alarm, press any button on
the electronic key.
■ Security feature
→P. 58
■ Alarm (if equipped)
Using the wireless remote control to lock the doors will set the alarm system.
(→P. 110)
■ Conditions affecting operation
→P. 60
■ If the wireless remote control does not operate properly
Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the mechanical key. (→P. 458)
■ Electronic key battery depletion
→P. 63

Before driving

Driver’s window and moon roof: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the driver’s
window and moon roof are opening.

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

■ When the electronic key battery is fully depleted
→P. 382
■ Confirmation of the registered key number
The number of keys already registered to the vehicle can be confirmed. Ask
your Toyota dealer for details.
■ Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e.g. trunk unlocking function) can be changed.
(Customizable features: →P. 498)
■ Certification for wireless remote control
U.S.A.
FCC ID: NI4TMLF10-4
FCC ID: NI4TMLF10-5
FCC ID: HYQ23AAB
FCC ID: HYQ14FBA
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Doors
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the entry function,
wireless remote control or door lock switch.

■ Entry function
1

→P. 53

Before driving

■ Wireless remote control
→P. 66
■ Door lock switch
Locks all the doors
Unlocks all the doors

■ Inside lock button
Unlocks the door
Locks the door
The front doors can be opened
by pulling the inside handle
even if the lock buttons are in
the lock position.

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Locking the doors from the outside without a key
STEP 1

Move the inside lock button to the lock position.

STEP 2

Close the door.

The door cannot be locked if the “POWER” switch is in ACCESSORY
or ON mode, or the electronic key is left inside the vehicle.
The key may not be detected correctly and the door may be locked.

Rear door child-protector lock
The door cannot be opened from
inside the vehicle when the lock
is set.
Unlock
Lock
These locks can be set to prevent
children from opening the rear
doors. Push down on each rear
door switch to lock both rear
doors.

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Automatic door locking and unlocking systems
The following functions can be set or cancelled:
Function

Operation
Shifting the shift lever out of P locks all
doors.

Shift position linked
door unlocking function

Shifting the shift lever to P unlocks all the
doors.

Speed linked door locking function

All the doors are locked when the vehicle
speed is approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) or
higher.

Driver's door linked door
unlocking function

All the doors are unlocked when the driver's
door is opened within 10 seconds after turning
the “POWER” switch off.

Before driving

Shift position linked
door locking function

■ Setting and canceling the functions (vehicles without navigation system and Display Audio system)
To switch between setting and canceling, follow the procedure
below.
STEP 1

Close all the doors and turn the “POWER” switch to ON
mode. (Perform step 2 within 10 seconds.)

STEP 2

Shift the shift lever to P or N, and
press and hold the driver's door
lock switch (
or
) for
approximately 5 seconds and
then release.
The shift lever and switch positions corresponding to the
desired function to be set are
shown in the following table.
Use the same procedure to cancel the function.

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Function
Shift position linked door locking function
Shift position linked door
unlocking function
Speed linked door locking function
Driver's door linked door unlocking function

Shift lever
position

Driver’s door lock
switch position

When the setting or canceling operation is complete, all the doors are
locked and then unlocked.
■ Using the mechanical key
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key.
(→P. 458)
■ If a wrong key is used
The key cylinder rotates freely to isolate inside mechanism.
■ If the smart key system has been deactivated in a customized setting
Use the wireless remote control or mechanical key. (→P. 66, 458)
■ Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e.g. unlocking function using a key) can be changed.
(Customizable features →P. 498)

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

CAUTION
■ To prevent an accident
Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.
Failure to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant falling out,
resulting in death or serious injury.
● Always lock all the doors.
● Ensure that all doors are properly closed.
● Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving.
The doors may be opened and the passengers are thrown out of the vehicle and it may result in serious injury or death.
Be especially careful for the front doors, as the doors may be opened even
if the inside lock buttons are in locked position.
● Set the rear door child-protector locks when children are seated in the rear
seats.

Before driving

● Always use a seat belt.

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Trunk
The trunk can be opened using the trunk opener, entry function or
wireless remote control.

■ Opening the trunk from inside the vehicle
Pull up the lever to release the
trunk lid.

■ Opening the trunk from outside the vehicle
Entry function
→P. 53
Wireless remote control
→P. 66

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

■ Trunk light
The trunk light turns on when the trunk is opened.
■ Function to prevent the trunk being locked with the electronic key
inside

● Even when the spare electronic key is put in the trunk with all the doors
locked, the key confinement prevention function can be activated so the
trunk can be opened. In order to prevent theft, take all electronic keys
with you when leaving the vehicle.
● Even when the electronic key is put in the trunk with all the doors are
locked, the key may not be detected depending on the places and the
surrounding radio wave conditions. In this case, the key confinement prevention function cannot be activated, causing the doors to lock when the
trunk is closed. Make sure to check where the key is before closing the
trunk.
● The key confinement prevention function cannot be activated if any one
of the doors is unlocked. In this case, open the trunk using the trunk
opener.
■ Internal trunk release lever
The trunk lid can be opened by pulling up
the glow-in-the-dark lever located on the
inside of the trunk lid.
The lever will continue to glow for some
time after the trunk lid is closed.

Before driving

● When all doors are being locked, closing the trunk lid with the electronic
key left inside the trunk will sound an alarm.
In this case, the trunk lid can be opened using the entry function.

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
● Keep the trunk lid closed while driving.
If the trunk lid is left open, it may hit near-by objects while driving or luggage in the trunk may be unexpectedly thrown out, causing an accident.
In addition, exhaust gases may enter the vehicle, causing death or a serious health hazard. Make sure to close the trunk lid before driving.
● Before driving the vehicle, make sure that the trunk lid is fully closed. If the
trunk lid is not fully closed, it may open unexpectedly while driving, causing an accident.
● Never let anyone sit in the trunk. In the event of sudden braking or a collision, they are susceptible to death or serious injury.
■ When children are in the vehicle
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Do not allow children to enter the trunk.
If a child is accidentally locked in the trunk, they could overheat or suffocate.
● Do not allow a child to open or close the trunk lid.
Doing so may cause the trunk lid to operate unexpectedly, or cause the
child’s hands, head, or neck to be caught by the closing trunk lid.

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

CAUTION
■ Using the trunk
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in serious injury.

● When opening or closing the trunk lid, thoroughly check to make sure the
surrounding area is safe.
● If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that
the trunk is about to open or close.
● Use caution when opening or closing the trunk lid in windy weather as it
may move abruptly in strong wind.
● The trunk lid may fall if it is not opened
fully. It is more difficult to open or close
the trunk lid on an incline than on a
level surface, so beware of the trunk lid
unexpectedly opening or closing by
itself. Make sure that the trunk lid is fully
open and secure before using the
trunk.
● When closing the trunk lid, take extra
care to prevent your fingers etc. from
being caught.
● When closing the trunk lid, make sure
to press it lightly on its outer surface.

● Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Toyota parts to the trunk
lid. Such additional weight on the trunk lid may cause the lid to fall closed
again after it is opened.

Before driving

● Remove any heavy loads, such as snow and ice, from the trunk lid before
opening it. Failure to do so may cause the trunk lid to fall closed again
after it is opened.

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Front seats
Manual seat
Seat position
lever

adjustment

Seatback angle adjustment
lever
Vertical height adjustment
lever (driver’s side only)

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Power seat

Before driving

Seat position adjustment switch
Seatback angle adjustment switch
Seat cushion (front) angle adjustment switch (driver’s side only)
Vertical height adjustment switch (driver’s side only)
Lumbar support adjustment switch (driver’s side only)

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

CAUTION
■ Seat adjustment
● To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not
recline the seat more than necessary.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply
restraint forces directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the
shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of
an accident.
Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpectedly move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
● Manual seat only: After adjusting the seat, make sure that the seat is
locked in position.

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Rear seats
The seatback of the right side rear seat can be folded down.

Folding down the rear seatback

Before driving

Pull the seatback lever in the
trunk.

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

CAUTION
■ When folding the rear seatback down
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
● Do not fold the seatback down while driving.
● Stop the vehicle on level ground, set the parking brake and shift the shift
lever to P.
● Do not allow anyone to sit on a folded seatback or in the trunk while driving.
● Do not allow children to enter the trunk.
■ When returning the seat to its original position
● Ensure that the seat belt does not get caught between or behind the seats.
● If the seat belt has been released from its guide, pass the seat belt through
its guide. (→P. 88)
■ Seat adjustment
Be careful not to get hands or feet pinched between the rear console box
and the rear seat when folding down the rear seatback.
■ After returning the seatback to the upright position
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
● Make sure the seatback is securely locked by pressing it forward and rearward on the top.
● Check that the seat belt is not twisted or caught in the seatback.
● Make sure that the seat belt is passing through its guide.

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Head restraints
Head restraints are provided for all seats.

Vertical
seats)

adjustment

(front
1

Up
Before driving

Pull the head restraints up.

Down
Lock release
button

Push the head restraint down
while pushing the lock release
button.

■ Removing the head restraints (front seats)
Pull the head restraint up while pressing
the lock release button.

■ Installing the head restraints (front seats)
Align the head restraint with the installation holes and push it down to the lock
position.
Press and hold the lock release button
when lowering the head restraint.

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

■ Adjusting the height of the head restraints (front seats)
Make sure that the head restraints are
adjusted so that the center of the head
restraint is closest to the top of your ears.

CAUTION
■ Head restraint precautions (front seat)
Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to
do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.
● Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.
● After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure
they are locked in position.
● Do not drive with the head restraints removed.

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Seat belts
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the vehicle.

■ Correct use of the seat belts
1

Before driving

● Extend the shoulder belt so
that it comes fully over the
shoulder, but does not
come into contact with the
neck or slide off the shoulder.
● Position the lap belt as low
as possible over the hips.
● Adjust the position of the
seatback. Sit up straight
and well back in the seat.
● Do not twist the seat belt.
■ Fastening and releasing the seat belt
To fasten the seat belt, push
the plate into the buckle
until a click sound is heard.
To release the seat belt,
press the release button.
Release button

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

■ Adjusting the seat belt shoulder anchor height (front seats)
Push the seat belt shoulder
anchor down while pressing
the release button.
Push the seat belt shoulder
anchor up.
Move the height adjuster up
and down as needed until you
hear a click.

Seat belt pretensioners (front seats)
The pretensioner helps the seat
belt to quickly restrain the occupant by retracting the seat belt
when the vehicle is subjected to
certain types of severe frontal or
side collision.
The pretensioner may not activate in the event of a minor frontal
impact, a minor side impact, a
rear impact or a vehicle rollover.

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

■ Emergency locking retractor (ELR)
The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also
lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to
extend so that you can move around fully.

■ Automatic locking retractor (ALR)

■ Pregnant women
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat
belt in the proper way. (→P. 85)
Women who are pregnant should position
the lap belt as low as possible over the
hips in the same manner as other occupants. Extend the shoulder belt completely over the shoulder and position the
belt across the chest. Avoid belt contact
over the rounding of the abdominal area.
If the seat belt is not worn properly, not
only a pregnant woman, but also the fetus
could suffer death or serious injury as a
result of sudden braking or a collision.
■ People suffering illness
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (→P. 85)

Before driving

When a passenger's shoulder belt is completely extended and then
retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be
extended. This feature is used to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly.
To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then pull the belt out once
more. (→P. 137)

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

■ Child seat belt usage
The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult
size.
● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child
becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt. (→P. 133)
● When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat
belt, follow the instructions on P. 85 regarding seat belt usage.
■ Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated
If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate
for the first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent collisions.
■ Seat belt extender
If your seat belts cannot be fastened
securely because they are not long
enough, a personalized seat belt
extender is available from your Toyota
dealer free of charge.

■ Rear seat belt
Use the seat belt after passing it through
the guide if the seat belt comes free from
the guide.

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

CAUTION
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of
sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

■ Wearing a seat belt
● Always wear a seat belt properly.
● Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt
for more than one person at once, including children.
● Toyota recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always
use a seat belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.
● To achieve a proper seating position, do not recline the seat more than
necessary. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting
up straight and well back in the seats.
● Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.
● Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.
■ When children are in the vehicle
Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes
twisted around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries
that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used
to cut the belt.
■ Seat belt pretensioners
● Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger's seat.
Doing so will disperse the passenger's weight, which prevents the sensor
from detecting the passenger's weight properly. As a result, the seat belt
pretensioner for the front passenger's seat may not activate in the event of
a collision.
● If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In
that case, the seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at
your Toyota dealer.

Before driving

● Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

CAUTION
■ Adjustable shoulder anchor
Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your
shoulder. The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off
your shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an
accident and cause death or serious injuries in the event of a sudden stop,
sudden swerve or accident. (→P. 86)
■ Seat belt damage and wear
● Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be
jammed in the door.
● Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose
parts. Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat
belts cannot protect an occupant from death or serious injury.
● Ensure that the belt and plate are locked and the belt is not twisted.
If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Toyota
dealer.
● Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been
involved in a serious accident, even if there is no obvious damage.
● Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the
seat belts. Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Toyota dealer.
Inappropriate handling of the pretensioner may prevent it from operating
properly, resulting in death or serious injury.
● Always make sure the shoulder belt passes through the guide when using
the seat belt. Failure to properly position the belt may reduce the amount
of protection in an accident and could lead to death or serious injury in a
collision or sudden stop.
● Always make sure that the seat belt is not twisted, does not get caught in
the guide or the seatback and is arranged in the proper position.

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

CAUTION
■ Using a seat belt extender
● Do not wear the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without
the extender.

● The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when
used by another person, or at a different seating position other than the
one originally intended.

NOTICE
■ When using a seat belt extender
When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the
extender, not on the seat belt.
This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself.

Before driving

● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system
because the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Steering wheel
The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position.
STEP 1

Hold the steering wheel and
push the lever down.

STEP 2

Adjust to the ideal position by
moving the steering wheel
horizontally and vertically.
After adjustment, pull the lever
up to secure the steering
wheel.

CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
■ After adjusting the steering wheel
Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.
Otherwise, the steering wheel may move suddenly, possibly causing an
accident, and resulting in death or serious injury.

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Anti-glare inside rear view mirror
Glare from the headlights of vehicles behind can be reduced by
using the following functions:

Manual anti-glare inside rear view mirror
1

Normal position
Anti-glare position

Before driving

Auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror
In automatic mode, sensors are used to detect the headlights of
vehicles behind and the reflected light is automatically reduced.
Turns automatic mode on/off
The indicator comes on when
automatic mode is turned on.
The mirror will revert to automatic mode each time the
“POWER” switch is turned to
ON mode.

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Adjusting the height of rear view mirror
Adjust the height of the rear view
mirror by moving it up and down.

■ To prevent sensor error (vehicles with auto anti-glare inside rear view
mirror)
To ensure that the sensors operate properly, do not touch or cover them.

CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.
Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Outside rear view mirrors
Mirror angle can be adjusted using the switch.
STEP 1

To select a mirror to adjust,
press the switch.
1

Left

STEP 2

Before driving

Right

To adjust the mirror, press the
switch.
Up
Right
Down
Left

Folding the mirrors
Push the mirror back in the direction of the vehicle's rear.

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

■ Mirror angle can be adjusted when
The “POWER” switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode.
■ When the mirrors are fogged up (vehicles with mirror defoggers)
Turn on the mirror defoggers to defog the mirrors. (→P. 239)

CAUTION
■ When driving the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while driving.
Failure to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an
accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
● Do not drive with the mirrors folded.
● Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly
adjusted before driving.
■ When a mirror is moving
To avoid personal injury and mirror malfunction, be careful not to get your
hand caught by the moving mirror.
■ When the mirror defoggers are operating (vehicles with mirror defoggers)
Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and
burn you.

1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

Power windows
The power windows can be opened and closed using the switches.

Operating the switch moves the windows as follows:
Closing

Before driving

One-touch closing (driver’s
window only)*
Opening
One-touch opening (driver’s
window only)*

*: Pressing

the switch in the
opposite direction will stop window travel partway.

Window lock switch
Press the switch down to lock
the passenger window switches.
Use this switch to prevent children from accidentally opening or
closing a passenger window.

1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

■ The power windows can be operated when
The “POWER” switch is in ON mode.
■ Operating the power windows after turning the engine off
The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even
after the “POWER” switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off.
They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
■ Jam protection function (driver’s window only)
If an object becomes caught between the window and the window frame,
window travel is stopped and the window is opened slightly.
■ When the power window does not close normally
If the jam protection function is operating abnormally and a window cannot
be closed, perform the following operations using the power window switch
on the driver’s door.
● After stopping the vehicle, the window can be closed by holding the
power window switch in the one-touch closing position while the
“POWER” switch is turned to ON mode.
● If the window still cannot be closed even by carrying out the operation
explained above, initialize the function by performing the following procedure.
STEP 1 Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position.

Continue holding the switch for a further 6 seconds after the window has closed.
STEP 2 Hold the power window switch in the one-touch opening position.

Continue holding the switch for a further 2 seconds after the window has opened completely.
STEP 3 Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position

once again. Continue holding the switch for a further 2 seconds
after the window has closed.
If you release the switch while the window is moving, start again from the
beginning.
If the window continues to close but then re-open slightly even after performing the above procedure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.

1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

■ Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e.g. key linked operation) can be changed.
(Customizable features: →P. 498)
1

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body
in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.
● Do not allow children to operate the power windows.
Closing a power window on someone can cause serious injury, and in
some instances, even death.
■ Jam protection function (driver’s window only)
● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection
function.
● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just
before the window fully closes.

Before driving

■ Closing the windows

1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

Moon roof∗

Use the overhead switches to open and close the moon roof and tilt
it up and down.

■ Opening and closing
Opens the moon roof*
The moon roof stops slightly
before the fully open position
to reduce wind noise.
Press the switch again to fully
open the moon roof.

Closes the moon roof*
*: Lightly press the switch in either
direction to stop the moon roof
partway.

■ Tilt up and down
Tilts the moon roof up*
Tilts the moon roof down*
*: Lightly press either of the moon
roof switches to stop the moon
roof partway.

∗: If equipped
100

1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

■ The moon roof can be operated when
The “POWER” switch is in ON mode.
■ Operating the moon roof after turning the engine off

■ Jam protection function
If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while the moon
roof is closing or tilting down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens
slightly.
■ Sunshade
The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade
will open automatically when the moon roof is opened.

101

Before driving

The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the
“POWER” switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. It cannot,
however, be operated once either front door is opened.

1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

■ When the moon roof does not close normally
Perform the following procedure:
● If the moon roof closes but then re-opens slightly
STEP 1 Stop the vehicle.
STEP 2 Press and hold the “CLOSE” switch.*1

The moon roof will close, reopen and pause for approximately 10
seconds.*2 Then it will close again, tilt up and pause for approximately 1 second. Finally, it will tilt down, open and close.
STEP 3 Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and

then release the switch.
● If the moon roof tilts down but then tilts back up
STEP 1 Stop the vehicle.
STEP 2 Press and hold the “UP” switch*1 until the moon roof moves into the

tilt up position and stops.
STEP 3 Release the “UP” switch once and then press and hold the “UP”

switch again.*1
The moon roof will pause for approximately 10 seconds in the tilt up
position.*2 Then it will adjust slightly and pause for approximately 1
second. Finally, it will tilt down, open and close.
STEP 4 Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and

then release the switch.
*1

: If the switch is released at the incorrect time, the procedure will have to
be performed again from the beginning.

*2: If the switch is released after the above mentioned 10 second pause,
automatic operation will be disabled. In that case, press and hold the
open/close switch in the close position or press and hold the “UP” switch.
The moon roof will tilt up and pause for approximately 1 second. Then it
will tilt down, open and close. Check to make sure that the moon roof is
completely closed and then release the switch.
If the moon roof does not fully close even after performing the above procedure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

102

1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

■ Moon roof open reminder function
The buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display
in the instrument cluster when the “POWER” switch is turned off and the
driver's door is opened with the moon roof open.
1

■ Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer

Before driving

Settings (e.g. key linked operation) can be changed.
(Customizable features: →P. 498)

CAUTION
■ Opening the moon roof
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehicle while it is moving.
● Do not sit on top of the moon roof.
■ Closing the moon roof
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their bodies in a position where they could be caught when the moon roof is being
operated.
● Do not allow children to operate the moon roof.
Closing the moon roof on someone can cause death or serious injury.
■ Jam protection function
● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection
function.
● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just
before the moon roof fully closes.

103

1-6. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank cap
Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap:

■ Before refueling the vehicle
Turn the “POWER” switch off and close all the doors and windows.
■ Opening the fuel tank cap
STEP 1

Pull up the opener to open the
fuel filler door.

STEP 2

Turn the fuel tank cap slowly
to open.

STEP 3

Hang the fuel tank cap on the
back of the fuel filler door.

104

1-6. Refueling

Closing the fuel tank cap
After refueling, turn the fuel tank
cap until you hear a click. Once
the cap is released, it will turn
slightly in the opposite direction.

Before driving
105

1-6. Refueling

CAUTION
■ When refueling the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle. Failure to do
so may result in death or serious injury.
● After exiting the vehicle and before opening the fuel door, touch an
unpainted metal surface to discharge any static electricity. It is important to
discharge static electricity before refueling because sparks resulting from
static electricity can cause fuel vapors to ignite while refueling.
● Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it.
A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened.
Wait until the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot
weather, pressurized fuel may spray out the filler neck and cause injury.
● Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their
body to come close to an open fuel tank.
● Do not inhale vaporized fuel.
Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.
● Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle.
Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.
● Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically
charged.
This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition
hazard.
■ When refueling
Securely insert the fuel nozzle into the fuel filler neck. If fuel is added with
the nozzle slightly lifted away from the fuel filler neck, the automatic shut off
function may not operate, resulting in fuel overflowing from the tank.
■ When replacing the fuel cap
Do not use anything but a genuine Toyota fuel tank cap designed for your
vehicle. Doing so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in
death or serious injury.

106

1-6. Refueling

NOTICE
■ Refueling

107

Before driving

Do not spill fuel during refueling.
Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the exhaust systems to
operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle's
painted surface.

1-7. Theft deterrent system

Immobilizer system
The vehicle's keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the
hybrid system from starting if a key has not been previously registered in the vehicle's on-board computer.
Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

The indicator light flashes after
the “POWER” switch has been
turned off to indicate that the
system is operating.
The indicator light stops flashing after the “POWER” switch
has been turned to ACCESSORY or ON mode to indicate
that the system has been canceled.

■ System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type immobilizer system.
■ Conditions affecting operation
Depending on the surrounding environment and conditions, the immobilizer
system may not operate properly. This may prevent the hybrid system from
starting. (→P. 60)
■ Certifications for the engine immobilizer system
U.S.A.
FCC ID: NI4TMIMB-3
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
108

1-7. Theft deterrent system

CAUTION
■ Certifications for the immobilizer system
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

■ To ensure the system operates correctly
Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper
operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.

109

Before driving

NOTICE

1-7. Theft deterrent system

Alarm∗

The system sounds the alarm and flashes the lights when forced
entry is detected.

■ Triggering of the alarm
The alarm is triggered in the following situations when the alarm
is set:
● A locked door or trunk is unlocked or opened in any way other
than using the entry function, wireless remote control or
mechanical key.
● The hood is opened.
● Some models: The window is tapped or broken.
■ Setting the alarm system
Close the doors, trunk and
hood, and lock all the doors.
The system will be set automatically after 30 seconds.
The indicator light changes
from being on to flashing when
the system is set.

■ Deactivating or stopping the alarm
Do one of the following to deactivate or stop the alarm.
● Unlock the doors or trunk. If the alarm does not stop even
when the wireless remote control is operated, repeat the operation until the alarm stops.
● Turn the “POWER” switch to ACCESSORY or ON mode, or
start the hybrid system. (The alarm will be deactivated or
stopped after a few seconds.)

∗: If equipped
110

1-7. Theft deterrent system

■ System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type alarm system.
■ Items to check before locking the vehicle
To prevent unexpected triggering of the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure
of the following:

Before driving

● Nobody is in the vehicle.
● The windows and moon roof are closed before the alarm is set.
● No valuables or other personal items are left in the vehicle.
■ Triggering of the alarm
The alarm may be triggered in the following situations.
(Stopping the alarm deactivates the system.)
● A person inside the vehicle opens a
door, the trunk or hood.

● The 12-volt battery is recharged or
replaced when the vehicle is locked.

■ Alarm-operated door lock
● When the alarm is operating, the doors are locked automatically to prevent intruders.
● Do not leave the key inside the vehicle when the alarm is operating, and
make sure the key is not inside the vehicle when recharging or replacing
the 12-volt battery.

111

1-7. Theft deterrent system

NOTICE
■ To ensure the system operates correctly
Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper
operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.

112

1-8. Safety information

Correct driving posture
Drive in a good posture as follows:

Sit upright and well back in
the seat. (→P. 78)

Adjust the seatback so that
the controls are easily operable.
Adjust the tilt and telescopic
positions of the steering
wheel downward so the airbag is facing your chest.
(→P. 92)
Lock the head restraint in
place with the center of the
head restraint closest to the
top of your ears. (→P. 83)
Wear the seat belt correctly.
(→P. 85)

113

Before driving

Adjust the position of the
seat forward or backward to
ensure the pedals can be
reached
and
easily
depressed to the extent
required. (→P. 78)

1-8. Safety information

CAUTION
■ While driving
● Do not adjust the position of the driver’s seat.
Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
● Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.
A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce
the effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint, increasing the risk of
death or serious injury to the driver or passenger.
● Do not place anything under the front seats.
Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat
tracks and stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. The adjustment mechanism may
also be damaged.
■ Adjusting the seat position
● Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers are not injured by the moving seat.
● Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid
injury.
Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.

114

1-8. Safety information

SRS airbags
The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain
types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the
occupants. They work together with the seat belts to help reduce the
risk of death or serious injury.

Before driving

SRS front airbags
SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag
Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passenger from impact with interior components
SRS knee airbags
Can help provide driver and front passenger protection
SRS side and curtain shield airbags
SRS front side airbags
Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants
SRS rear side airbags
Can help protect the torso of occupants in the rear outer seats

115

1-8. Safety information

SRS curtain shield airbags
Can help protect primarily the head of occupants in the outer
seats

SRS airbag system components

Front impact sensors
Front passenger occupant
classification system (ECU
and sensors)
Knee airbag

SRS warning light
Front passenger’s seat belt
buckle switch

Side impact sensors (front
door)

Airbag sensor assembly

Side impact sensors (front)

Driver airbag

Front passenger airbag

Driver’s seat belt buckle
switch

Front side airbags
Curtain shield airbags
Rear side airbags

116

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR
BAG OFF” indicator lights

Side impact sensors (rear)

Seat belt pretensioners and
force limiters

1-8. Safety information

117

Before driving

Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based
on the US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag
sensor assembly (ECU) controls airbag deployment based on information obtained from the sensors etc. shown in the system components diagram above. This information includes crash severity and
occupant information. As the airbags deploy, a chemical reaction in
the inflators quickly fills the airbags with nontoxic gas to help restrain
the motion of the occupants.

1-8. Safety information

■ If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)
● Bruising and slight abrasions may result from contact with a deploying
(inflating) SRS airbag.
● A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.
● Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator)
as well as the seats, parts of the front and rear pillars, and roof side rails,
may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.
● The windshield may crack.
● For Safety Connect subscribers, if the SRS airbags deploy or in the event
of a severe rear-end collision, the system is designed to send an emergency call to the response center, notifying them of the vehicle’s location
(without needing to push the “SOS” button) and an agent will attempt to
speak with the occupants to ascertain the level of emergency and assistance required. If the occupants are unable to communicate, the agent
automatically treats the call as an emergency and helps to dispatch the
necessary emergency services. (→P. 324)
■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS front airbags/SRS curtain
shield airbags)
● The SRS front airbags and SRS curtain shield airbags will deploy in the
event of an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force
corresponding to an approximately 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h] frontal collision with a fixed wall that does not move or deform).
However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher if the vehicle
strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle and sign pole, which can move
or deform on impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an underride collision
(e.g. a collision in which the front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes
under, the bed of a truck etc.).
● Depending on the type of collision, it is possible that only the seat belt
pretensioners will activate.
● The SRS front airbags for the front passenger will not activate if there is
no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the SRS front
airbags for the front passenger may deploy if luggage is put in the seat,
even if the seat is unoccupied. (→P. 128)

118

1-8. Safety information

■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS side and curtain shield airbags)

● The SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy in the event of a severe
frontal collision.
■ Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other
than a collision
The SRS front airbags and SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy if a
serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are
shown in the illustration.
● Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or
hard surface
● Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
● Landing hard or falling

119

Before driving

● The SRS side and curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of an
impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to the impact force produced by an approximately 3300 lb.
[1500 kg] vehicle colliding with the vehicle cabin from a direction perpendicular to the vehicle orientation at an approximate speed of 12 - 18 mph
[20 - 30 km/h]).

1-8. Safety information

■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS front airbags)
The SRS front airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a
side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal
collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward
deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may occur.
● Collision from the side
● Collision from the rear
● Vehicle rollover

120

1-8. Safety information

■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags
(SRS side and curtain shield airbags)
The SRS side and curtain shield airbags may not activate if the vehicle is
subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the
side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment.

● Collision from the side at an angle

SRS side airbags: Do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed side collision.
SRS curtain shield airbags: Do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved
in a rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed side collision.
● Collision from the front*
● Collision from the rear
● Vehicle rollover
*: Depending on the conditions and type
of accident, the curtain shield airbags
may deploy (inflate) upon frontal
impact.

121

Before driving

● Collision from the side to the vehicle
body other than the passenger compartment

1-8. Safety information

■ When to contact your Toyota dealer
In the following cases, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
● Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.
● The front of the vehicle is damaged or
deformed, or was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to
cause the SRS front airbags and SRS
curtain shield airbags to inflate.

● A portion of a door is damaged or
deformed, or the vehicle was involved
in an accident that was not severe
enough to cause the SRS side and curtain shield airbags to inflate.

● The pad section of the steering wheel,
dashboard near the front passenger airbag or lower portion of the instrument
panel is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

● The surface of the seats with the side
airbag is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
● The portion of the front pillars, rear pillars or roof side rail garnishes (padding)
containing the curtain shield airbags
inside is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

122

1-8. Safety information

CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the SRS airbags.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

● The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause
death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag.
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) advises:
Since the risk zone for the driver’s airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm)
of inflation, placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag provides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the
center of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 10 in.
(250 mm) away now, you can change your driving position in several
ways:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
• Slightly recline the back of the seat.
Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in.
(250 mm) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of
your seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm,
non-slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature.
• If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the airbag toward your chest instead of your head and neck.
The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while
still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of
the instrument panel controls.

123

Before driving

● The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts
properly.
The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.

1-8. Safety information

CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
● If the seat belt extender has been connected to the front seat belt buckles but
the seat belt extender has not also
been fastened to the latch plate of the
seat belt, the SRS front airbags will
judge that the driver and front passenger are wearing the seat belt even
though the seat belt has not been connected. In this case, the SRS front airbags may not activate correctly in a
collision, resulting in death or serious
injury in the event of a collision. Be sure
to wear the seat belt with the seat belt
extender.
● The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and
can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very
close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits
upright.
● Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or
seriously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small
to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Toyota strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in
the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are
safer for infants and children than the front passenger seat. (→P. 133)
● Do not sit on the edge of the seat or
lean against the dashboard.

124

1-8. Safety information

CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
● Do not allow a child to stand in front of
the SRS front passenger airbag unit or
sit on the knees of a front passenger.

● Do not lean against the door, the roof
side rail or the front, side and rear pillars.

● Do not allow anyone to kneel on the
passenger seats toward the door or put
their head or hands outside the vehicle.

● Do not attach anything to or lean anything against areas such as the dashboard, steering wheel pad and lower
portion of the instrument panel.
These items can become projectiles
when the SRS driver, front passenger
and knee airbags deploy.

125

Before driving

● Do not allow the front seat occupants to
hold items on their knees.

1-8. Safety information

CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
● Do not attach anything to areas such as
a door, windshield glass, side door
glass, front or rear pillar, roof side rail
and assist grip.

● Do not hang coat hangers or other hard objects on the coat hooks. All of
these items could become projectiles and may cause death or serious
injury, should the SRS curtain shield airbags deploy.
● If a vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbag will deploy,
be sure to remove it.
● Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side
airbags inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags. Such
accessories may prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, disable
the system or cause the side airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in
death or serious injury.
● Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS airbag components.
Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.
● Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS airbags have deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.

126

1-8. Safety information

CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
● If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbags have deployed, open a
door or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do
so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.

■ Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components
Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications
without consulting your Toyota dealer. The SRS airbags may malfunction or
deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing death or serious injury.
● Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags
● Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel,
instrument panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear
pillars or roof side rails
● Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the
occupant compartment
● Installation of snow plows, winches, etc. to the front grille (bull bars or kangaroo bar etc.)
● Modifications to the vehicle's suspension system
● Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios and CD
players
● Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability

127

Before driving

● If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel
pad and front and rear pillar garnishes, are damaged or cracked, have
them replaced by your Toyota dealer.

1-8. Safety information

Front passenger occupant classification system
Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification system. This system detects the conditions of the front passenger seat and activates or deactivates the devices for the front
passenger.

SRS warning light
Seat belt reminder light
“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light
“AIR BAG ON” indicator light

128

1-8. Safety information

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system
■ Adult*1
Indicator/
warning light

“AIR BAG
ON”

SRS warning light

Off

Seat belt reminder light

Flashing*2

Front passenger airbag
Side airbag on the front
passenger seat
Curtain shield airbag in the front
passenger side
Front passenger knee airbag
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner

Activated

■ Child*3 or child restraint system*4
Indicator/
warning light

Devices

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights

“AIR BAG
OFF”*5

SRS warning light

Off

Seat belt reminder light

Flashing*2

Front passenger airbag
Side airbag on the front
passenger seat
Curtain shield airbag in the front
passenger side
Front passenger knee airbag
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner

Deactivated
Activated
Deactivated
Activated

129

Before driving

Devices

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights

1-8. Safety information

■ Unoccupied
Indicator/
warning light

Devices

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
SRS warning light
Seat belt reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Side airbag on the front
passenger seat
Curtain shield airbag in the front
passenger side
Front passenger knee airbag
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner

“AIR BAG
OFF”
Off
Deactivated
Activated
Deactivated
Activated

■ There is a malfunction in the system
Indicator/
warning light

Devices

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
SRS warning light
Seat belt reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Side airbag on the front
passenger seats
Curtain shield airbag in the front
passenger side
Front passenger knee airbag
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner

“AIR BAG
OFF”
On
Deactivated
Activated
Deactivated
Activated

: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a
smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.

*2:

In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.

*3:

When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system
sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/
her as an adult depending on his/her physique or posture.

130

1-8. Safety information

*4:

Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only
be installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable.
(→P. 133)

*5:

In case the indicator light is not illuminated, consult this manual
on how to install the child restraint system properly. (→P. 137)

■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the front passenger occupant
classification system.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● Wear the seat belt properly.
● Make sure the front passenger’s seat belt plate has not been left inserted
into the buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat.
● Make sure the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is not illuminated when using
the seat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat
belt buckle, and reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender
after making sure the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illuminated. If you
use the seat belt extender while the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, the SRS airbags for the passenger may not activate correctly,
which could cause death or serious injury in the event of a collision.
● Do not apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat or equipment.
● Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or
feet on the front passenger seat seatback from the rear passenger seat.
● Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or
press on the seatback with their legs.
● Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.

131

Before driving

CAUTION

1-8. Safety information

CAUTION
■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
● Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a rear
seat. This may cause the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light to be illuminated,
which indicates that the passenger’s airbags will not deploy in the event of
a severe accident. If the seatback touches the rear seat, return the seatback to a position where it does not touch the rear seat. Keep the front
passenger seatback as upright as possible when the vehicle is moving.
Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the effectiveness of the
seat belt system.
● If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the “AIR BAG ON” indicator
light is illuminated. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator is illuminated, ask the
passenger to sit up straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and
with the seat belt worn correctly. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator still
remains illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the rear seat, or
if that is not possible, move the front passenger seat fully rearward.
● When it is unavoidable to install a forward-facing child restraint system on
the front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat in the proper order. (→P. 137)
● Do not modify or remove the front seats.
● Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Otherwise, the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the
detection system. In this case, contact your Toyota dealer immediately.
● Child restraint systems installed on the rear seat should not contact the
front seatbacks.
● Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion and seat cover, that covers the seat cushion surface.
● Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat.

132

1-8. Safety information

Child restraint systems
A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder
belt.
The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. and Canada now require the
use of child restraint systems.

Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is
much safer than installing one on the front passenger seat.
● Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is
appropriate to the age and size of the child.
● For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the
child restraint system.
General installation instructions are provided in this manual.
(→P. 137)

133

Before driving

Points to remember

1-8. Safety information

Types of child restraints
Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types
according to the age and size of the child:
Rear facing ⎯ Infant seat/convertible seat

Forward facing ⎯ Convertible seat

Booster seat

134

1-8. Safety information

■ Selecting an appropriate child restraint system
● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child
becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.
● If the child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear
seat and use the vehicle's seat belt. (→P. 85)

■ Child restraint precautions
● For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child
must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system
depending on the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is
not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be
crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle's interior.
● Toyota strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that conforms to the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat
than in the front seat.
● Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger
seat even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated. In the event
of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag
can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child
restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat.
● A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. A child restraint system that
requires a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat
since there is no top tether strap anchor for the front passenger seat.
Adjust the seatback as upright as possible and always move the seat as
far back as possible even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable
speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured.

135

Before driving

CAUTION

1-8. Safety information

CAUTION
■ Child restraint precautions
● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system
on the front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system
with the seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not
securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden stop,
sudden swerve or accident.
● Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body
against the door or the area of the seat, front and rear pillars or roof side
rails from which the SRS side airbags or SRS curtain shield airbags deploy
even if the child is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if
the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the impact
could cause death or serious injury to the child.
● Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by
the child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If
it is not secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child
in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or an accident.
■ When children are in the vehicle
Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes
twisted around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries
that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used
to cut the belt.
■ When the child restraint system is not in use
● Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is
not in use.
Do not store the child restraint system unsecured in the passenger compartment.
● If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the
vehicle or store it securely in the trunk. This will prevent it from injuring
passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.

136

1-8. Safety information

Installing child restraints
Follow the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions. Firmly
secure child restraints to the seats using the LATCH anchors or a
seat belt. Attach the top tether strap when installing a child restraint.

Child restraint LATCH anchors
LATCH anchors are provided
for the outer rear seats. (Buttons displaying the location of
the anchors are attached to
the seats.)

Seat belts equipped with a
child restraint locking mechanism (ALR/ELR belts except
driver’s seat belt) (→P. 85)

Anchor brackets (for top tether
strap)
An anchor bracket is provided
for each rear seat.

137

Before driving

The lap/shoulder belt can be used if your child restraint system is
not compatible with the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children) system.

1-8. Safety information

Installation with LATCH system
Type A
STEP 1

Widen the gap between the seat cushion and seatback
slightly.

STEP 2

Latch the hooks of the lower
straps onto the LATCH anchors.
If the child restraint has a top
tether strap, the top tether strap
should be latched onto the top
tether strap anchor.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint
system indicates the presence of
a lower connector system.

Canada only

138

1-8. Safety information

Type B
Widen the gap between the seat cushion and seatback
slightly.

STEP 2

Latch the buckles onto the
LATCH anchors. If the child
restraint has a top tether strap,
the top tether strap should be
latched onto the top tether strap
anchor.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint
system indicates the presence of
a lower connector system.

Canada only

139

Before driving

STEP 1

1-8. Safety information

Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock function belt)
■ Rear facing ⎯ Infant seat/convertible seat
STEP 1

Place the child restraint system
on the rear seat facing the rear
of the vehicle.

STEP 2

Run the seat belt through the
child restraint system and insert
the plate into the buckle. Make
sure that the belt is not twisted.

STEP 3

Fully extend the shoulder belt
and allow it to retract to put it in
lock mode. In lock mode, the belt
cannot be extended.

140

1-8. Safety information

STEP 4

While pushing the child restraint
system down into the rear seat,
allow the shoulder belt to retract
until the child restraint system is
securely in place.

■ Forward facing ⎯ Convertible seat
STEP 1

Place the child restraint system
on the seat facing the front of the
vehicle.

STEP 2

Run the seat belt through the
child restraint system and insert
the plate into the buckle. Make
sure that the belt is not twisted.

STEP 3

Fully extend the shoulder belt
and allow it to retract to put it in
lock mode. In lock mode, the belt
cannot be extended.

141

Before driving

After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
check that it cannot be extended.

1-8. Safety information

While pushing the child restraint
system into the rear seat, allow
the shoulder belt to retract until
the child restraint system is
securely in place.

STEP 4

After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
check that it cannot be extended.
STEP 5

If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap
should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor. (→P. 143)

■ Booster seat
STEP 1

Place the child restraint system
on the seat facing the front of the
vehicle.

STEP 2

Sit the child in the child restraint
system. Fit the seat belt to the
child restraint system according
to the manufacturer's instructions and insert the plate into the
buckle. Make sure that the belt is
not twisted.
Check that the shoulder belt is
correctly positioned over the
child's shoulder and that the lap
belt is as low as possible.
(→P. 85)

142

1-8. Safety information

Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt
Push the buckle release button
and fully retract the seat belt.

Before driving

Child restraint systems with a top tether strap
STEP 1

Secure the child restraint using
the seat belt or LATCH anchors.

STEP 2

Open the anchor bracket cover,
latch the hook onto the anchor
bracket and tighten the top tether
strap.
Make sure the top tether strap is
securely latched.

143

1-8. Safety information

■ Laws and regulations pertaining to anchorages
The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.
Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications can be used.
This vehicle is designed to conform to SAE J1819.

CAUTION
■ When installing a booster seat
To prevent the belt from going into ALR lock mode, do not fully extend the
shoulder belt. ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only. This could cause
injury or discomfort to the child. (→P. 87)

144

1-8. Safety information

CAUTION
■ When installing a child restraint system

● If the driver's seat interferes with the
child restraint system and prevents it
from being attached correctly, attach
the child restraint system to the righthand rear seat.
● Adjust the front passenger seat so that
it does not interfere with the child
restraint system.
● Only put a forward-facing child restraint
system on the front seat when unavoidable. When installing a forward-facing
child restraint system on the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back
as possible even if the “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator light is illuminated. Failure to
do so may result in death or serious
injury if the airbags deploy (inflate).

145

Before driving

Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual
and fix the child restraint system securely in place.
If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other
passengers may be seriously injured or even killed in the event of sudden
braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

1-8. Safety information

CAUTION
■ When installing a child restraint system
● When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is
positioned across the center of the child's shoulder. The belt should be
kept away from the child's neck, but not so that it could fall off the child's
shoulder. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury in the event
of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
● Ensure that the belt and plate are securely locked and the seat belt is not
twisted.
● Push and pull the child restraint system from side to side and forward to be
sure it is secure.
● After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.
● Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system
manufacturer.
■ Do not use a seat belt extender
If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the
seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause
death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
■ To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors
When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects
around the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child
restraint. Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached, or it may
cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of
sudden braking, sudden swerve or an accident.

146

2-1. Driving procedures

Driving the vehicle
The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving:

■ Starting the hybrid system
→P. 159

■ Driving
STEP 1

With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D.
(→P. 169)

STEP 2

Release the parking brake. (→P. 172)

STEP 3

Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the
accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.

■ Stopping
STEP 1

With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.

STEP 2

If necessary, set the parking brake.
If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift
the shift lever to P. (→P. 169)

■ Parking the vehicle
STEP 1

With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.

STEP 2

Set the parking brake. (→P. 172)

STEP 3

Shift the shift lever to P. (→P. 169)
If parking on a hill, block the wheels as needed.

STEP 4

Press the “POWER” switch to stop the hybrid system.

STEP 5

Lock the door, making sure that you have the electronic key
on your person.

148

2-1. Driving procedures

Starting off on a steep uphill
STEP 1

Make sure that the parking brake is set and shift the shift lever
to D.

STEP 2

Gently depress the accelerator pedal.

STEP 3

Release the parking brake.

■ Driving in the rain
● Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the
windows may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.

● Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain,
because there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road
surface, preventing the steering and brakes from operating properly.
■ Engine speed while driving
In the following conditions, the engine speed may become high while driving.
This is due to automatic up-shifting control or down-shifting implementation
to meet driving conditions. It dose not indicate sudden acceleration.
● The vehicle is judged to be driving uphill or downhill
● When the accelerator pedal is released
■ Breaking in your new Toyota
To extend the life of the vehicle, observing the following precautions is recommended:
● For the first 200 miles (300 km):
Avoid sudden stops.
● For the first 1000 miles (1600 km):
• Do not drive at extremely high speeds.
• Avoid sudden acceleration.
• Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.

149

When driving

● Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be
especially slippery.

2-1. Driving procedures

■ Drum-in-disc type parking brake system
Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system. This type of
brake system needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodically or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drum are replaced. Have your Toyota
dealer perform the bedding down operation.
■ Operating your vehicle in a foreign country
Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability
of the correct fuel. (→P. 474)
■ For efficient use
● Shift the shift lever to D when driving.
In the N position, the gasoline engine operates but electricity cannot be
generated. The hybrid battery (traction battery) will discharge, requiring
unnecessary engine power to recharge.
● Drive your vehicle smoothly.
Avoid abrupt acceleration and deceleration. Gradual acceleration and
deceleration will make more effective use of the electric motor (traction
motor) without having to use gasoline engine power.
● Avoid repeated acceleration.
Repeated acceleration consumes hybrid battery (traction battery) power,
resulting in poor acceleration. Battery power can be restored by driving
with the accelerator pedal slightly released.
● Shift the shift lever to P when parking.
In the N position, the hybrid battery (traction battery) does not recharge.
Leaving the shift lever in the N position for an extended period of time
may discharge the hybrid battery. The vehicle cannot run if the hybrid
battery is discharged.
■ When “DRIVING FORCE LIMITED” is displayed on the multi-information display
Driving force is being limited. This is not a malfunction.

150

2-1. Driving procedures

CAUTION
■ When starting the vehicle
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the hybrid system operating. This prevents the vehicle from creeping.
■ When driving the vehicle
● Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accelerator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.

● Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.
The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. These hot
parts may cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby.
● Do not let the vehicle roll backward while the shift lever is in a driving position, or roll forward while the shift lever is in R.
Doing so may result in an accident or damage to the vehicle.
● If the smell of exhaust is noticed inside the vehicle, open the windows and
check that the trunk is closed. Large amounts of exhaust in the vehicle can
cause driver drowsiness and an accident, resulting in death or a serious
health hazard. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

151

When driving

• Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake
pedal will result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident
that could result in death or serious injury.
• When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a difficulty in operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.
• Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the
vehicle only slightly. This allows you to depress the brake and accelerator pedals properly.
• Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake
pedal using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, resulting in an accident.
● When the hybrid vehicle is driven using the electric motor only, no engine
noise is made. As such, pedestrians, people riding bicycles or other people and vehicles in the surrounding area may not realize that the vehicle is
approaching. Even with the Vehicle Proximity Notification System active,
people may not realize the vehicle is approaching when the surrounding
area is noisy and so forth. Therefore, take extra care while driving.

2-1. Driving procedures

CAUTION
● Do not shift the shift lever to P while the vehicle is moving.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle
control.
● Do not shift the shift lever to R while the vehicle is moving forward.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle
control.
● Do not shift the shift lever to D while the vehicle is moving backward.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle
control.
● Moving the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving will disengage the
hybrid system. Engine braking is not available with the hybrid system disengaged.
● During normal driving, do not turn off the hybrid system. Turning the hybrid
system off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control,
but the power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more
difficult to steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so.
However, in the event of an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible
to stop the vehicle in the normal way: →P. 470
● Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving
down a steep hill.
Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose
effectiveness. (→P. 169)
● Do not adjust the position of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or
outside rear view mirrors while driving.
Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control that can cause accidents,
resulting in death or serious injury.
● Always check that all passengers' arms, heads or other parts of their body
are not outside the vehicle, as this may result in death or serious injury.

152

2-1. Driving procedures

CAUTION
● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has highspeed capability tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire
failure, loss of control and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer
to determine whether the tires on your vehicle are high-speed capability
tires or not before driving at such speeds.
■ When driving on slippery road surfaces

● Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and
reduce your ability to control the vehicle, resulting in an accident.

● After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make
sure that the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent
the brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet
and not functioning properly, steering control may be affected, resulting in
an accident.
■ When shifting the shift lever
Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
Shifting the shift lever to a gear other than P or N may lead to unexpected
rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in
death or serious injury.
■ If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indicators)
Have the brake pads checked and replaced by your Toyota dealer as soon
as possible.
Rotor damage may result if the pads are not replaced when needed.
It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads
and/or those of the brake discs are exceeded.

153

When driving

● Sudden acceleration, engine braking due to shift changing, or changes in
engine speed could cause the vehicle to skid, resulting in an accident.

2-1. Driving procedures

CAUTION
■ When the vehicle is stopped
● Do not depress the accelerator pedal unnecessarily.
If the vehicle is in any gear other than P or N, the vehicle may accelerate
suddenly and unexpectedly, causing an accident.
● Do not leave the vehicle with the hybrid system on for a long time.
If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space
and check that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.
● In order to prevent accidents due to the vehicle rolling away, always keep
depressing the brake pedal while the “READY” indicator is on. Apply the
parking brake as necessary.
● If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused
by the vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal
and securely apply the parking brake as needed.
● Avoid revving or racing the engine.
Running the engine at high speed while the vehicle is stopped may cause
the exhaust system to overheat, which could result in a fire if combustible
material is nearby.

154

2-1. Driving procedures

CAUTION
■ When the vehicle is parked
● Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in
the vehicle when it is in the sun.
Doing so may result in the following:

● Do not attach adhesive discs to the windshield or windows. Do not place
containers such as air fresheners on the instrument panel or dashboard.
Adhesive discs or containers may act as lenses, causing a fire in the vehicle.
● Do not leave a door or window open if the curved glass is coated with a
metallized film such as a silver-colored one. Reflected sunlight may cause
the glass to act as a lens, causing a fire.
● Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P, stop the hybrid
system and lock the vehicle.
Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the hybrid system is operating.
● Do not touch the exhaust pipe while the hybrid system is operating or
immediately after turning the hybrid system off.
Doing so may cause burns.
● Do not leave the hybrid system operating in an area with snow build-up, or
where it is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the
hybrid system is operating, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

155

When driving

• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a
fire.
• The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and
plastic material of glasses to deform or crack.
• Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the
interior of the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle's electrical components.
● Do not leave cigarette lighters in the vehicle. If a cigarette lighter is in a
place such as the glove box or on the floor, it may be lit accidentally when
luggage is loaded or the seat is adjusted, causing a fire.

2-1. Driving procedures

CAUTION
■ Exhaust gases
Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless
and odorless. Inhaling exhaust gases may lead to death or a serious health
hazard.
● If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area, stop the hybrid system. In a
closed area, such as a garage, exhaust gases may collect and enter the
vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
● The exhaust system should be checked occasionally. If there is a hole or
crack caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise,
be sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by your Toyota dealer.
Failure to do so may allow exhaust gases to enter the vehicle, resulting in
death or a serious health hazard.
■ When taking a nap in the vehicle
Always turn the hybrid system off. Otherwise, if you accidentally move the
shift lever or depress the accelerator pedal, this could cause an accident or
fire due to hybrid system overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in
a poorly ventilated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle,
leading to death or a serious health hazard.

156

2-1. Driving procedures

CAUTION
■ When braking
● When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.
Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and this may cause
one side of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also the
parking brake may not securely hold the vehicle.

● The brake system consists of 2 individual hydraulic systems; if one of the
systems fails, the others will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal
should be depressed more firmly than usual and the braking distance will
increase. If this happens, do not continue to drive the vehicle. If the brake
system warning light (red indicator) comes on together with the buzzer
sound while driving, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.

NOTICE
■ When driving the vehicle
● Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during
driving, as this may restrain driving torque.
● Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelerator and brake
pedals at the same time to hold the vehicle on a hill.
■ When parking the vehicle
Always shift the shift lever to P. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to
move or the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed.

157

When driving

● If the electronically controlled brake system does not operate, do not follow other vehicles closely and avoid hills or sharp turns that require braking.
In this case, braking is still possible, but the brake pedal should be
depressed more firmly than usual. Also, the braking distance will increase.

2-1. Driving procedures

NOTICE
■ Avoiding damage to vehicle parts
● Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for
an extended period of time.
Doing so may damage the power steering motor.
● When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid
damaging the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.
■ If you get a flat tire while driving
A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and gradually depress the brake pedal to slow down and stop
the vehicle in a safe place.
● It may be difficult to control your vehicle.
● The vehicle will make abnormal sounds or vibrations.
● The vehicle will behave abnormally.
Information on what to do in case of a flat tire (→P. 442)
■ When encountering flooded roads
Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may
cause the following serious damage to the vehicle:
● Engine stalling
● Short in electrical components
● Engine damage caused by water immersion
In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be
sure to have your Toyota dealer check the following:
● Brake function
● Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, hybrid
transmission, etc.
● Lubricant condition for the bearings and suspension joints (where possible), and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.

158

2-1. Driving procedures

Power (ignition) switch
Performing the following operations when carrying the electronic
key on your person starts the hybrid system or changes “POWER”
switch modes.

■ Starting the hybrid system
STEP 1

Check that the parking brake is set.

STEP 2

Check that the shift lever is set in P.
If the shift lever is not set in P, the hybrid system may not be
started. (→P. 169)

Firmly depress the brake pedal.

When driving

STEP 3

will be displayed on the multi-information display.
If it is not displayed, the hybrid system cannot be started.
STEP 4

Press the “POWER” switch.
After a while, the “READY”
indicator comes on with a beep
sound.
The vehicle can move when
the “READY” indicator is on
even if the engine is stopped.
Continue depressing the brake
pedal until the hybrid system is
completely started.
The hybrid system can be
started from any “POWER”
switch mode.

STEP 5

Check that the “READY” indicator is on.
The vehicle will not move when the “READY” indicator is off.

159

2-1. Driving procedures

■ Stopping the hybrid system
STEP 1

Stop the vehicle.

STEP 2

Shift the shift lever to P.

STEP 3

Set the parking brake. (→P. 172)

STEP 4

Release the brake pedal.

STEP 5

Press the “POWER” switch.

STEP 6

Check that

160

on the multi-information display is off.

2-1. Driving procedures

■ Changing “POWER” switch modes
Modes can be changed by pressing the “POWER” switch with
brake pedal released. (The mode changes each time the switch
is pressed.)
Off*
The emergency flashers can
be used.

ACCESSORY mode
Some electrical components
such as the audio system can
be used.
will be displayed on
the multi-information display.

ON mode
All electrical components can
be used.
will be displayed on
the multi-information display.
*: If the shift lever is in a position
other than P when turning off
the
hybrid
system,
the
“POWER” switch will be turned
to ACCESSORY mode, not to
off.

161

When driving

The multi-information display
will not be displayed.

2-1. Driving procedures

When stopping the hybrid system with the shift lever in a
position other than P
If the hybrid system is stopped with the shift lever in a position other
than P, the “POWER” switch will not be turned off but instead be
turned to ACCESSORY mode. Perform the following procedure to
turn the switch off:
STEP 1

Check that the parking brake is set.

STEP 2

Shift the shift lever to P.

STEP 3

Check that

is displayed on the multi-information dis-

play and then press the “POWER” switch once.
STEP 4

Check that

on the multi-information display is off.

■ Auto power off function
If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode for more than 20 minutes or ON
mode (the hybrid system is not operating) for more than an hour with the
shift lever in P, the “POWER” switch will automatically turn off. However, this
function cannot entirely prevent 12-volt battery discharge. Do not leave the
vehicle with the “POWER” switch in ACCESSORY or ON mode for long periods of time when the hybrid system is not operating.
■ Sounds and vibrations specific to a hybrid vehicle
→P. 32
■ Electronic key battery depletion
→P. 63
■ When the ambient temperature is low, such as during winter driving
conditions
It may take time until the “READY” indicator comes on.
■ Conditions affecting operation
→P. 60

162

2-1. Driving procedures

■ Note for the entry function
→P. 61
■ If the hybrid system does not start
● The immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (→P. 108)
● Check that the shift lever is securely set
in P. The hybrid system may not start if
the shift lever is displaced out of P.
“SHIFT TO P POSITION TO START”
will be displayed on the multi-information display.

After turning the “POWER” switch off and opening and closing the doors, the
steering wheel will be locked due to the steering lock function. Operating the
“POWER” switch again automatically cancels the steering lock.
■ When the steering lock cannot be released
“STEERING LOCK ACTIVE” will be displayed on the multi-information display.
Check that the shift lever is set in P. Press
the “POWER” switch while turning the
steering wheel left and right.

■ Steering lock motor overheating prevention
To prevent the steering lock motor from overheating, the motor may be suspended if the hybrid system is turned on and off repeatedly in a short period
of time. In this case, refrain from operating the hybrid system. After about 10
seconds, the steering lock motor will resume functioning.
■ When “CHECK SMART KEY SYSTEM” will be displayed on the multiinformation display.
The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer immediately.

163

When driving

■ Steering lock

2-1. Driving procedures

■ If the “READY” indicator does not come on
If the “READY” indicator does not come on when you press the “POWER”
switch with the shift lever in P and the brake pedal depressed, contact your
Toyota dealer immediately.
■ If the hybrid system is malfunctioning
→P. 424
■ If the electronic key battery is depleted
→P. 382
■ Operation of the “POWER” switch
● When operating the “POWER” switch, one short, firm press is enough. If
the switch is pressed improperly, the hybrid system may not start or the
“POWER” switch mode may not change. It is not necessary to press and
hold the switch.
● If attempting to restart the hybrid system immediately after turning the
“POWER” switch off, the hybrid system may not start in some cases.
After turning the “POWER” switch off, please wait a few seconds before
restarting the hybrid system.
■ If the smart key system has been deactivated in a customized setting
→P. 459

CAUTION
■ When starting the hybrid system
Always start the hybrid system while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not
depress the accelerator pedal while starting the hybrid system under any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Caution while driving
If hybrid system failure occurs while the vehicle is moving, do not lock or
open the doors until the vehicle reaches a safe and complete stop. Activation of the steering lock in this circumstance may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

164

2-1. Driving procedures

CAUTION
■ Stopping the hybrid system in an emergency
If you want to stop the hybrid system in an emergency while driving the vehicle, press and hold the “POWER” switch for more than 2 seconds, or press it
briefly 3 times or more in succession.
However, do not touch the “POWER” switch while driving except in an emergency. Turning the hybrid system off while driving will not cause loss of
steering or braking control, but the power assist to these systems will be lost.
This will make it more difficult to steer and brake, so you should pull over
and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

When driving

NOTICE
■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
● Do not leave the “POWER” switch in ACCESSORY or ON mode for long
periods of time without the hybrid system on.
● If

is displayed on the multi-information display, the “POWER”

switch is not off. Exit the vehicle after turning the “POWER” switch off.
● Do not stop the hybrid system when the shift lever is in a position other
than P. If the hybrid system is stopped in another shift lever position, the
“POWER” switch will not be turned off but instead be turned to ACCESSORY mode. If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode, 12-volt battery
discharge may occur.
■ When starting the hybrid system
Do not depress the accelerator pedal unnecessarily.
■ Symptoms indicating a malfunction with the “POWER” switch
If the “POWER” switch seems to be operating somewhat differently than
usual, such as the switch sticking slightly, there may be a malfunction. Contact your Toyota dealer immediately.

165

2-1. Driving procedures

EV drive mode
In EV drive mode the electric motor (traction motor), powered by the
hybrid battery (traction battery), is used to drive the vehicle.
This mode allows you to drive in residential areas early in the morning and late at night, or in indoor parking lots etc. without concern
for noises and gas emissions.
However, when the Vehicle Proximity Notification System is active,
the vehicle may produce sound.

Turns EV drive mode on/off
When EV drive mode is turned
on, the EV drive mode indicator will come on. Pressing the
switch when in EV drive mode
will return the vehicle to normal
driving (using the gasoline
engine and electric motor [traction motor]).

166

2-1. Driving procedures

■ Switching to EV drive mode when the gasoline engine is cold
If the hybrid system is started while the gasoline engine is cold, the gasoline
engine will start automatically after a short period of time in order to warm
up. In this case, you will become unable to switch to EV drive mode.
After the hybrid system has started and the “READY” indicator has illuminated, press the EV drive mode switch before the gasoline engine starts to
switch to EV drive mode.
■ Situations in which EV drive mode cannot be turned on

● The temperature of the hybrid system is high.
The vehicle has been left in the sun, driven on a hill, driven at high
speeds, etc.
● The temperature of the hybrid system is low.
The vehicle has been left in temperatures lower than about 68°F (20°C)
for a long period of time etc.
● The gasoline engine is warming up.
● The hybrid battery (traction battery) is low.
The remaining battery level indicated in the “Energy Monitor” display is
low. (→P. 39)
● Vehicle speed is about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more.
● The accelerator pedal is depressed firmly or the vehicle is on a hill etc.
● The windshield defogger is in use.

167

When driving

It may not be possible to turn EV drive mode on in the following situations. If
it cannot be turned on, a buzzer will sound and a message will be shown on
the multi-information display.

2-1. Driving procedures

■ Automatic cancelation of EV drive mode
When driving in EV drive mode, the gasoline engine may automatically
restart in the following situations. When EV drive mode is canceled, a buzzer
will sound and the EV drive mode indicator will flash and go off.
● The hybrid battery (traction battery) becomes low.
The remaining battery level indicated in the “Energy Monitor” display is
low. (→P. 39)
● Vehicle speed becomes more than about 25 mph (40 km/h).
● The accelerator pedal is depressed firmly or the vehicle is on a hill etc.
■ Possible driving distance when driving in EV drive mode
EV drive mode’s possible driving distance ranges from a few hundred yards
(a few hundred meters) to approximately 1.3 miles (2 km). Driving is possible
at speeds of less than approximately 25 mph (40 km/h). However, depending on vehicle conditions, there are situations when EV drive mode cannot
be used.
(The distance that is possible depends on the hybrid battery [traction battery]
level and driving conditions.)
■ Fuel economy
Your Toyota is designed to achieve the best possible fuel economy during
normal driving (using the gasoline engine and electric motor [traction
motor]). Driving in EV drive mode more than necessary may lower fuel economy.

CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
When driving in EV drive mode no engine noise is made. As such, pedestrians, people riding bicycles or other people and vehicles in the surrounding
area may not be aware of the vehicle starting off or approaching them.
Therefore, take extra care while driving even if the Vehicle Proximity Notification System is active.

168

2-1. Driving procedures

Hybrid transmission
Select a shift position appropriate for the driving conditions.

■ Shifting the shift lever

When driving

While the “POWER” switch is in ON mode, move the shift
lever with the brake pedal depressed.
When shifting the shift lever between P and D, make sure that the
vehicle is completely stopped.

■ Shift position Purpose
Shift position

Function

Parking the vehicle/starting the hybrid system

Reversing

Neutral

Normal driving

Position for engine braking

169

2-1. Driving procedures

■ Selecting Eco drive mode
When the vehicle is driven in Eco drive mode, vehicle driving
force and operation of the air conditioning system (heating/cooling) is controlled to improve fuel efficiency.
Eco drive mode
When eco drive mode is turned
on, the “ECO MODE” indicator
will come on.
Pressing the “ECO MODE”
switch again turns eco drive
mode off.

■ Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode
Eco drive mode controls the heating/cooling operations and fan speed of the
air conditioning system to enhance fuel efficiency. (→P. 232) To improve air
conditioning performance, adjust the fan speed or turn off Eco drive mode.
■ When in heavy traffic
If the shift lever is in N, the hybrid battery (traction battery) will not be
charged. To help prevent the battery from discharging, avoid putting the shift
lever in N for an extended period of time.
■ If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
→P. 456

CAUTION
■ When driving on slippery road surfaces
Do not accelerate or shift gears suddenly.
Sudden changes in engine braking may cause the vehicle to spin or skid,
resulting in an accident.

170

2-1. Driving procedures

Turn signal lever
The turn signal lever can be used to show the following intentions
of the driver:
Right turn
Left turn
Lane change to the right
(push and hold the lever
partway)

Lane change to the left
(push and hold the lever
partway)
The left hand signals will flash
until you release the lever.

■ Turn signals can be operated when
The “POWER” switch is in ON mode.
■ If the indicators flashes faster than usual
Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned
out.

171

When driving

The right hand signals will
flash until you release the
lever.

2-1. Driving procedures

Parking brake

U.S.A. Canada

To set the parking brake, fully
depress the parking brake
pedal with your left foot while
depressing the brake pedal
with your right foot.
(Depressing the pedal again
releases the parking brake.)

■ Usage in winter time
See “Winter driving tips” for parking brake usage in winter time. (→P. 225)

NOTICE
■ Before driving
Fully release the parking brake.
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components
overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake
wear.

172

2-1. Driving procedures

Horn
To sound the horn, press on or
close to the

mark.

When driving

■ After adjusting the steering wheel
Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.
The horn may not sound if the steering wheel is not securely locked.
(→P. 92)

173

2-2. Instrument cluster

Gauges and meters

Hybrid System Indicator
Displays hybrid system power output and regenerative level

Speedometer
Displays the vehicle speed.

Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank.

Average fuel consumption meter
Displays the average fuel consumption since the function was reset.

Current fuel consumption gauge
Displays the current rate of fuel consumption.

Display change button
→P. 176

Odometer/trip meter display
→P. 176

Multi-information display
→P. 185

174

2-2. Instrument cluster

Engine coolant temperature display/instrument panel light control display
Displays the engine coolant temperature and instrument panel light
control.

Outside temperature display
→P. 301

Shift position display

Displays the currently selected shift position.

When driving

→P. 169

Instrument panel light control button
→P. 177

175

2-2. Instrument cluster

Changing the odometer/trip meter display
Pressing the button changes the
display as follows.

● Odometer
Displays the total distance the vehicle has
been driven.

● Trip meters A and B
Displays the distance the vehicle has been
driven since the meter was last reset. Trip
meters A and B can be used to record and display different distances independently.
Press and hold the button to reset.

176

2-2. Instrument cluster

Instrument panel light control button
The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted.
Pressing the button will adjust
brightness of the instrument
panel lights.
2

When driving
177

2-2. Instrument cluster

■ The meters and display illuminate when
The “POWER” switch is in ON mode.
■ Hybrid System Indicator
Power area
Shows that an Eco-friendly driving
range is being exceeded (during full
power driving etc.)
Eco area
Shows that the vehicle is being driven
in an Eco-friendly manner.
Hybrid Eco area
Shows that gasoline engine power is
not being used very often.
The gasoline engine will automatically
stop and restart under various conditions.
Charge area
Shows that energy is being recovered
via the regenerative brake.
● By keeping the indicator needle within Eco area, more Eco-friendly driving can be achieved.
● Charge area indicates regeneration* status. Regenerated energy will be
used to charge the battery.
*: When used in this manual, “regeneration” refers to the conversion of
energy created by the movement of the vehicle into electrical energy.
■ Engine speed
On hybrid vehicles, engine speed is precisely controlled in order to help
improve fuel efficiency and reduce exhaust emissions etc.
There are times when the engine speed that is displayed may differ even
when vehicle operation and driving conditions are the same.

178

2-2. Instrument cluster

■ The brightness of the instrument panel lights
When the tail lights are turned on, the meter’s brightness will be reduced
slightly unless the meter brightness level adjustment is set to the brightest
setting.
If the tail lights are turned on when the surroundings are dark, the meter’s
brightness will reduce slightly. However, when the surroundings are bright,
such as during the daytime, the meter’s brightness will not be reduced even
if the tail lights are turned on.
■ Fuel gauge and odometer/trip meter display remain on mode

position. Press the display change button to change between the
odometer and trip meter displays.

NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the engine and its components
The engine may be overheating if the rightmost segment of the engine coolant temperature display is flashing. In this case, immediately stop the vehicle
in a safe place, and check the engine after it has cooled completely.
(→P. 465)

179

When driving

After the “POWER” switch has been turned off, the fuel gauge and odometer/trip meter display remain on for 10 minutes, enabling the fuel gauge and
odometer/trip meter values to be checked again without having to turn the
“POWER” switch to ON mode.
When confirming the gauges and meters, turn the headlight switch to the

2-2. Instrument cluster

Indicators and warning lights
The indicator and warning lights on the instrument cluster, center
panel and outside rear view mirrors inform the driver of the status of
the vehicle’s various systems.

■ Instrument cluster

■ Center panel

180

2-2. Instrument cluster

■ Outside rear view mirrors (if equipped)

When driving
181

2-2. Instrument cluster

■ Indicators
The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the
vehicle’s various systems.
Turn signal indicator
(→P. 171)

*2
(if equipped)

Headlight high beam
indicator (→P. 194)

BSM outside rear view
mirror indicators
(→P. 215)
Headlight indicator
(→P. 192)

(U.S.A.)

*1, 3

Slip indicator
(→P. 208)

Tail light indicator
(→P. 192)
(Canada)

VSC OFF indicator
(→P. 209)

Front fog light indicator
(→P. 198)
(if equipped)

“TRAC OFF” indicator
(→P. 209)

SRS airbag on-off indicator (→P. 128)

Security indicator
(→P. 108, 110)

Cruise control indicator
(→P. 204)

“ECO MODE” indicator
(→P. 170)

Cruise control set indicator (→P. 204)

“READY” indicator
(→P. 159)

EV Indicator (→P. 30)

Shift position indicators (→P. 169)

182

EV drive mode indicator (→P. 166)

2-2. Instrument cluster

*1: These

lights turn on when the “POWER” switch is turned to ON
mode to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will
turn off after the hybrid system is on, or after a few seconds. There
may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on, or if
the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.

*2: In order to confirm operation, the BSM outside rear view mirror indicators illuminate in the following situations:

If the system is functioning correctly, the BSM outside rear view mirror indicators will turn off after a few seconds.
If the BSM outside rear view mirror indicators do not illuminate or do
not turn off, there may be a malfunction with the system.
If this occurs, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

*3: The light flashes to indicate that the system is operating.

183

When driving

• When the “POWER” switch is turned to ON mode while the BSM
main switch is set to ON.
• When the BSM main switch is set to ON while the “POWER”
switch is in ON mode.

2-2. Instrument cluster

■ Warning lights
Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in any of the
vehicle’s systems. (→P. 413)

*1, 2

*1, 3

*1, 2

*1, 3

*1, 2

(red)

*1, 3

*1
(yellow)

*1: These

*2: For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
*3: For vehicles sold in Canada

CAUTION
■ If a safety system warning light does not come on
Should a safety system light such as the ABS and SRS warning light not
come on when you start the hybrid system, this could mean that these systems are not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result
in death or serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately if this occurs.

184

2-2. Instrument cluster

Multi-information display
The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of
driving-related data.

● Trip information

(→P. 187)

Displays cruising range, fuel
consumption and other cruising-related information.

● Warning messages
(→P. 423)

185

When driving

Automatically displayed when
a malfunction occurs in one of
the vehicle’s systems.

2-2. Instrument cluster

■ Display contents

Trip information contents

Switching display items

Cruising range/average fuel
consumption
Average vehicle speed/
elapsed time
Eco drive level
Energy monitor
Customization
- (off)

186

Press the “DISP” button.

2-2. Instrument cluster

Trip information
■ Cruising range/average fuel consumption
Cruising range
Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with
the quantity of fuel remaining.

Average fuel consumption
Displays the average fuel consumption since the function was
reset.
• The function can be reset by pressing the “DISP” button for longer
than 1 second when the average fuel consumption is displayed.
The average fuel consumption meter will also be reset, returning the
needle to the 0 position.
• Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.

■ Average vehicle speed/elapsed time
Displays the average vehicle speed and elapsed time since the
hybrid system was started.

187

When driving

• This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption.
As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that
displayed.
• When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the display
may not be updated.
When refueling, turn the “POWER” switch off. If the vehicle is refueled
without turning the “POWER” switch off, the display may not be
updated.

2-2. Instrument cluster

■ Eco drive level
Displays the average fuel consumption and eco drive level since
the hybrid system was started.
Even if a different screen has been selected for the multi-information display, when the “POWER” switch is turned off, the eco drive level is displayed. This is not a malfunction.
When the highest eco drive level has been achieved “EXCELLENT!” is
displayed.

■ Energy monitor
Displays the status of the hybrid system (→P. 39)
■ Customization
Language, Eco Indicator (current fuel consumption gauge) and EV
Indicator settings can be changed. (→P. 188)
Customizing vehicle features
It is possible to customize the language, Eco Indicator (current fuel
consumption gauge) and EV Indicator settings using the “DISP” button.
When customizing vehicle features, ensure that the vehicle is parked
in a safe place with the shift position in P and the parking brake set.
■ Language
STEP 1

188

Press the “DISP” button to display the setting screen while the
vehicle is stopped, and then
press and hold the “DISP” button
to display the customize mode
screen.

2-2. Instrument cluster

STEP 2

Press the “DISP” button to select
the item to be set, then press
and hold the “DISP” button.

STEP 3

Press the “DISP” button to select
the desired setting, and then
press and hold the “DISP” button.

■ Eco Indicator (current fuel consumption gauge)
STEP 1

Press the “DISP” button to display the setting screen while the
vehicle is stopped, and then
press and hold the “DISP” button
to display the customize mode
screen.

189

When driving

To go back to the previous screen or exit the customize mode, press
the “DISP” button to select “EXIT”, and then press and hold the
“DISP” button.

2-2. Instrument cluster

STEP 2

Press the “DISP” button to select
the item to be set, then press
and hold the “DISP” button.

STEP 3

Press the “DISP” button to select
the desired setting, and then
press and hold the “DISP” button.
When the “ECO INDICATOR” is
set to “OFF”, the current fuel consumption gauge will not be displayed.

To go back to the previous screen or exit the customize mode, press
the “DISP” button to select “EXIT”, and then press and hold the
“DISP” button.
■ EV Indicator
STEP 1

190

Press the “DISP” button to display the setting screen while the
vehicle is stopped, and then
press and hold the “DISP” button
to display the customize mode
screen.

2-2. Instrument cluster

STEP 2

Press the “DISP” button to select
the item to be set, then press
and hold the “DISP” button.

STEP 3

Press the “DISP” button to select
the desired setting, and then
press and hold the “DISP” button.

NOTICE
■ The multi-information display at low temperatures
Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal
information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display
monitor may respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.

191

When driving

To go back to the previous screen or exit the customize mode, press
the “DISP” button to select “EXIT”, and then press and hold the
“DISP” button.

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Headlight switch
The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.

Turning the end of the lever turns on the lights as follows:
U.S.A.
The headlights, parking
lights, daytime running
lights and so on turn on
and off automatically
(when the “POWER”
switch is in ON mode).
The side marker, parking, tail, license plate,
daytime running lights
and instrument panel
lights turn on.
The headlights and all
the lights listed above
(except daytime running lights) turn on.
The daytime running
light turns off.

192

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Canada
The headlights, parking lights, daytime running lights and so on
turn on and off automatically (when the
“POWER” switch is in
ON mode).

The side marker, parking, tail, license plate,
daytime running lights
and instrument panel
lights turn on.

When driving

The headlights and all
the lights listed above
(except daytime running lights) turn on.
The daytime running
lights turn on.

193

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Turning on the high beam headlights
With the headlights on, push
the lever away from you to
turn on the high beams.
Pull the lever toward you to the
center position to turn the high
beams off.

Pull the lever toward you and
release it to flash the high
beams once.
You can flash the high beams
with the headlights on or off.

Manual headlight leveling dial (if equipped)
The level of the headlights can be adjusted according to the number
of passengers and the loading condition of the vehicle.
Raises the level of the headlights
Lowers the level of the headlights

194

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

■ Guide to dial settings
Occupancy and luggage load conditions

Dial position

Luggage load

Driver

None

Driver and front passenger

None

All seats occupied

None

All seats occupied

Full luggage loading

2.5

Driver

Full luggage loading

4.5

When driving

Occupants

■ Daytime running light system
● To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers, the headlights turn on
automatically (at a reduced intensity) whenever the hybrid system is
started and the parking brake is released. Daytime running lights are not
designed for use at night.
U.S.A.: Daytime running lights can be turned off by operating the switch.
● Compared to turning on the headlights, the daytime running light system
offers greater durability and consumes less electricity, so it can help
improve fuel economy.
■ Headlight control sensor
The sensor may not function properly if
an object is placed on the sensor, or anything that blocks the sensor is affixed to
the windshield.
Doing so interferes with the sensor
detecting the level of ambient light and
may cause the automatic headlight system to malfunction.

195

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

■ Automatic light off system
When the light switch is in

: The headlights and tail lights turn off 30

seconds after the “POWER” switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or
turned off and a door is opened and closed. (The lights turn off immediately if
on the key is pressed twice after all the doors are closed.)
To turn the lights on again, turn the “POWER” switch to ON mode, or turn the
light switch off once and then back to

If any of the doors or trunk lid is kept open, the lights automatically turn off
after 20 minutes.
■ Light reminder buzzer
A buzzer sounds when the “POWER” switch is turned off or turned to
ACCESSORY mode and the driver's door is opened while the lights are
turned on.
■ 12-volt battery-saving function
In order to prevent the vehicle 12-volt battery from discharging, if the headlights and/or tail lights are on when the “POWER” switch is turned off the 12volt battery saving function will operate and automatically turn off all the
lights after approximately 20 minutes.
When the “POWER” switch is turned to ON mode, the 12-volt battery-saving
function will be disabled.
When any of the following are performed, the 12-volt battery-saving function
is canceled once and then reactivated. All the lights will turn off automatically
20 minutes after the 12-volt battery-saving function has been reactivated:
● When the headlight switch is operated
● When a door is opened or closed
■ Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e.g. Light sensor sensitivity) can be changed.
(Customizable features →P. 498)

196

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

NOTICE
■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is
off.

When driving
197

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Fog light switch∗

The fog lights secure excellent visibility in difficult driving conditions, such as in rain and fog.

U.S.A.
Turns the front fog lights off
Turns the front fog lights on

∗: If equipped
198

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Canada
Turns the front fog lights off
Turns the front fog lights on

When driving

■ Fog lights can be used when
The headlights are on in low beam.

199

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Windshield wipers and washer

When

is selected, the wiper interval can be adjusted for

intermittent operation.

The wiper operation is selected by moving the lever as follows.
U.S.A.
Intermittent
windshield
wiper operation
Low speed windshield wiper
operation
High speed windshield
wiper operation
Temporary operation

Increases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency
Decreases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency

200

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Washer/wiper dual operation
The wipers will automatically
operate a couple of times after
the washer squirts.

Canada
is selected, the wiper interval can be adjusted for inter-

mittent operation.

The wiper operation is selected by moving the lever as follows.
Intermittent
windshield
wiper operation
Low speed windshield wiper
operation
High speed windshield
wiper operation
Temporary operation

201

When driving

When

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Increases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency
Decreases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency

Washer/wiper dual operation
The wipers will automatically
operate a couple of times after
the washer squirts.

■ The windshield wipers and washer can be operated when
The “POWER” switch is in ON mode.
■ If no windshield washer fluid sprays
Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the
windshield washer fluid reservoir.

202

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

NOTICE
■ When the windshield is dry
Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.
■ When the washer fluid tank is empty
Do not operate the switch continually as the washer fluid pump may overheat.
■ When a nozzle becomes blocked

In this case, contact your Toyota dealer.
Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.
When driving
203

2-4. Using other driving systems

Cruise control
Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without depressing
the accelerator pedal.

Indicators
Cruise control switch

■ Setting the vehicle speed
STEP 1

Press the “ON-OFF” button to
activate the cruise control.
Cruise control indicator will
come on.
Press the button again to
deactivate the cruise control.

STEP 2

Accelerate or decelerate the
vehicle to the desired speed,
and push the lever down to set
the speed.
“SET” indicator will come on.
The vehicle speed at the
moment the lever is released
becomes the set speed.

204

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Adjusting the set speed
To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set
speed is obtained.
Increases the speed
Decreases the speed
Fine adjustment: Momentarily
move the lever in the desired
direction.

The set speed will be increased or decreased as follows:
Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the
lever is operated.
Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased continually until the lever is released.

■ Canceling and resuming the constant speed control
Pulling the lever toward you
cancels the constant speed
control.
The speed setting is also canceled when the brakes are
applied.

Pushing the lever up
resumes
the
constant
speed control.
Resuming is available when
the vehicle speed is more
than approximately 25 mph
(40 km/h).

205

When driving

Large adjustment: Hold the
lever in the desired direction.

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Cruise control can be set when
● The shift lever is in D.
● Vehicle speed is above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
■ Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed
● The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set
speed resumes.
● Even without canceling the cruise control, the set speed can be
increased by first accelerating the vehicle to the desired speed and then
pushing the lever down to set the new speed.
■ Automatic cruise control cancelation
Cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in any of the following
situations.
● Actual vehicle speed falls more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h)
below the preset vehicle speed.
At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.
● Actual vehicle speed is below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
● Enhanced VSC is activated.

CAUTION
■ To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake
Switch the cruise control off using the “ON-OFF” button when not in use.
■ Situations unsuitable for cruise control
Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in loss of control and could cause an accident resulting
in death or serious injury.
● In heavy traffic
● On roads with sharp bends
● On winding roads
● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
● On steep hills
Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.
206

2-4. Using other driving systems

Driving assist systems
To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following systems operate automatically in response to various driving situations.
Be aware, however, that these systems are supplementary and
should not be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.

■ ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if
the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface.
2

■ Brake assist

■ VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)
Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning
on slippery road surfaces.

■ TRAC (Traction Control)
Helps to maintain drive power and prevent the drive wheels from spinning when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads.

■ Hill-start assist control
→P. 213

■ EPS (Electric Power Steering)
Employs an electric motor to reduce the amount of effort needed to turn
the steering wheel.

■ Enhanced VSC (Enhanced vehicle stability control)
Provides cooperative control of the ABS, TRAC, VSC and EPS.
Helps to maintain directional stability when swerving on slippery road
surfaces by controlling steering performance.

■ BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) (if equipped)
→P. 215

207

When driving

Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is
depressed when the system detects a panic stop situation.

2-4. Using other driving systems

When the TRAC/VSC/ABS systems are operating
The slip indicator flashes to indicate that the ABS/VSC/TRAC
systems are operating.

208

2-4. Using other driving systems

Disabling the TRAC/VSC systems
If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, the TRAC/VSC systems may reduce power from the hybrid system to the wheels. You
may need to turn the system off to enable you to rock the vehicle in
order to free it.
■ Turning off the TRAC system only
Quickly push and release the
switch to turn off TRAC.

Press the switch again to turn the
system back on.

■ Turning off both TRAC and VSC systems
Push and hold the switch for
more than 3 seconds while the
vehicle is stopped to turn off
TRAC and VSC.
The “TRAC OFF” and VSC OFF
indicator lights should come on.
Press the switch again to turn the
systems back on.

209

When driving

The “TRAC OFF” indicator light
should come on.

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ When the “TRAC OFF” indicator light comes on even if the VSC OFF
switch has not been pressed
TRAC cannot be operated. Contact your Toyota dealer.
■ Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, brake assist, VSC and
TRAC
● A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the hybrid
system is started or just after the vehicle begins to move, if the brake
pedal is depressed forcefully or repeatedly, or 1 - 2 minuets after the
hybrid system is stopped. This sound does not indicate that a malfunction has occurred in any of these systems.
● Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are
operating. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.
•
•
•
•

Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.
A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.
The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the ABS is activated.
The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated.

■ EPS operation sound
When the steering wheel is operated, a motor sound (whirring sound) may
be heard. This does not indicate a malfunction.
■ Reactivation of the TRAC/VSC systems
Turning off the hybrid system after turning off the TRAC/VSC systems will
automatically reactivate them.
■ Reactivation of the TRAC system linked to vehicle speed
When only the TRAC system is turned off, the TRAC system will turn on
when vehicle speed increases. However, when both TRAC and VSC systems are turned off, the systems will not turn on even when vehicle speed
increases.

210

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Reduced effectiveness of the EPS system
The effectiveness of the EPS system is reduced to prevent the system from
overheating when there is frequent steering input over an extended period of
time. The steering wheel may feel heavy as a result. Should this occur,
refrain from excessive steering input or stop the vehicle and turn the hybrid
system off. The EPS system should return to normal within 10 minutes.
■ If the slip indicator comes on...
It may indicate a malfunction in the TRAC, VSC and ABS. Contact your
Toyota dealer.

■ ABS does not operate effectively when
● Tires with inadequate gripping ability are used (such as excessively worn
tires on a snow covered road).
● The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on the wet or slick
road.
■ Stopping distance when the ABS is operating may exceed that of normal conditions
The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle’s stopping distance. Always
maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you in the following situations:
● When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads
● When driving with tire chains
● When driving over bumps in the road
● When driving over roads with potholes or roads with uneven surfaces
■ TRAC may not operate effectively when
Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery road surfaces, even if the TRAC system is operating.
Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost.

211

When driving

CAUTION

2-4. Using other driving systems

CAUTION
■ When the VSC is activated
The slip indicator light flashes. Always drive carefully. Reckless driving may
cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator light flashes.
■ When the TRAC/VSC systems are turned off
Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road conditions. As these are the systems to ensure vehicle stability and driving force,
do not turn the TRAC/VSC systems off unless necessary.
■ Replacing tires
Make sure that all tires are of the specified size, brand, tread pattern and
total load capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the
recommended tire inflation pressure level.
The ABS, TRAC and VSC systems will not function correctly if different tires
are installed on the vehicle.
Contact your Toyota dealer for further information when replacing tires or
wheels.
■ Handling of tires and suspension
Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect
the driving assist systems, and may cause a system to malfunction.

212

2-4. Using other driving systems

Hill-start assist control
Hill-start assist control helps to prevent the vehicle from rolling
backwards when starting on an incline or slippery slope.

To engage hill-start assist control, further depress the brake
pedal when the vehicle is
stopped completely.

■ Hill-start assist control can be operated when
● The shift lever is in a position other than P.
● The parking brake is not applied.
● The accelerator pedal is not depressed.
■ Hill-start assist control
● While hill-start assist control is operating, the brakes remain automatically applied after the driver releases the brake pedal. The stop lights and
the high mounted stoplight turn on.
● Hill-start assist control operates for about 2 seconds after the brake pedal
is released.
● If the slip indicator does not flash and the buzzer does not sound when
the brake pedal is further depressed, slightly reduce the pressure on the
brake pedal (do not allow the vehicle to roll backward) and then firmly
depress it again. If the system still does not operate, check if the operating conditions explained above have been met.

213

When driving

A buzzer will sound once to
indicate the system is activated. The slip indicator will
also start flashing.

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Hill-start assist control buzzer
● When hill-start assist control is activated, the buzzer will sound once.
● In the following situations, hill-start assist control will be canceled and the
buzzer will sound twice.
• No attempt is made to drive the vehicle within approximately 2 seconds
of releasing the brake pedal.
• The shift lever is moved to P.
• The parking brake is applied.
• The brake pedal is depressed again.
• The brake pedal has been depressed for more than approximately 3
minutes.
■ If the slip indicator comes on
It may indicate a malfunction in the system. Contact your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION
■ Hill-start assist control
● Do not overly rely on hill-start assist control. Hill-start assist control may
not operate effectively on extremely steep inclines or roads covered in ice.
● Unlike the parking brake, hill-start assist control is not intended to hold the
vehicle stationary for an extended period of time. Do not attempt to use
hill-start assist control to hold the vehicle on an incline for an extended
period of time, as doing so may lead to an accident.

214

2-4. Using other driving systems

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)∗
The Blind Spot Monitor is a system that assists the driver to confirm
safety when changing lanes.
The system uses radar sensors to detect vehicles that are traveling
in an adjacent lane in the area that is not reflected in the outside rear
view mirror (the blind spot), and advises the driver of the vehicles
existence via the outside rear view mirror indicator.
2

When driving

BSM main switch
Pressing the switch turns the system on or off. When the switch is set
to on, the switch’s indicator illuminates.

Outside rear view mirror indicator
When a vehicle is detected in the blind spot, the outside rear view mirror indicator on that side illuminates. If the turn signal lever is operated
when a vehicle is in the blind spot, the outside rear view mirror indicator
flashes.

∗: If equipped
215

2-4. Using other driving systems

The Blind Spot Monitor detection areas
The blind spot that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.
The range of the detection area
extends to:
Approximately 11.5 ft. (3.5 m)
from the side of the vehicle
The first 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) from the
side of the vehicle is not in the
detection area

Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m)
from the rear bumper
Approximately 3.3 ft. (1 m) forward of the rear bumper

■ The Blind Spot Monitor is operational when
The BSM main switch is set to ON and vehicle speed is greater than about
25 mph (40 km/h)
■ The Blind Spot Monitor will detect a vehicle when
● A vehicle in an adjacent lane overtakes your vehicle
● Another vehicle enters the detection area when it changes lanes.

216

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Conditions under which the Blind Spot Monitor will not detect a vehicle
The Blind Spot Monitor is not designed to detect the following types of vehicles and/or objects:
● Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians etc.*
● Vehicles traveling in the opposite direction
● Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles and similar stationary objects*
● Following vehicles that are in the same lane*
● Vehicles driving 2 lanes across from your vehicle*

*: Depending on conditions, detection of a vehicle and/or object may occur

● The Blind Spot Monitor may not detect vehicles correctly in the following
conditions:
• During bad weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow etc.
• When ice or mud etc. is attached to the rear bumper
• When driving on a road surface that is wet due to rain, standing water
etc.
• When there is a significant difference in speed between your vehicle
and the vehicle that enters the detection area
• When a vehicle is in the detection area from a stop and remains in the
detection area as your vehicle accelerates
• When driving up or down consecutive steep inclines, such as hills, a
dip in the road etc.
• When multiple vehicles approach with only a small gap between each
vehicle
• When vehicle lanes are wide, and the vehicle in the next lane is too far
away from your vehicle
• When the vehicle that enters the detection area is traveling at about
the same speed as your vehicle
• When there is a significant difference in height between your vehicle
and the vehicle that enters the detection area.
• Directly after the BSM switch is set to on.

217

When driving

■ Conditions under which the Blind Spot Monitor may not function correctly

2-4. Using other driving systems

● Instances of the Blind Spot Monitor unnecessarily detecting a vehicle
and/or object may increase under the following conditions:
• When there is only a short distance between your vehicle and a guardrail, wall etc.
• When there is only a short distance between your vehicle and a following vehicle.
• When vehicle lanes are narrow and a vehicle driving 2 lanes across
from your vehicle enters the detection area
■ The outside rear view mirror indicators visibility
When under strong sunlight, the outside rear view mirror indicator may be
difficult to see.
■ When there is a malfunction in the system
If a system malfunction is detected due to any of the following reasons,
warning messages will be displayed: (→P. 425)
● There is a malfunction with the sensors
● The sensors have become dirty
● The outside temperature is extremely high or low
● The sensor voltage has become abnormal
■ Certification for the BSM
FCC ID: OAYBSDTX
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following three conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
(3) This device may only work when the vehicle is in operation pursuant to
§ 15.252 (a) (4).
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

218

2-4. Using other driving systems

CAUTION
■ Cautions regarding the use of the system
The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking
care to observe your surroundings.
The Blind Spot Monitor is a supplementary system which alerts the driver
that a vehicle is present in the blind spot. Do not overly rely on the Blind Spot
Monitor. The system cannot judge if it is safe to change lanes, therefore over
reliance could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. According to conditions, the system may not function correctly. Therefore the
driver’s own visual confirmation of safety is necessary.
One Blind Spot Monitor is installed inside the left and right side of the vehicle
rear bumper respectively. Observe the following to ensure the Blind Spot
Monitor can function correctly.
● Keep the sensor and its surrounding
area on the bumper clean at all times.

● Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper to a strong
impact. If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may malfunction and vehicles that enter the detection area may not be detected. If
the sensor or surrounding area is subject to a strong impact, always have
the area inspected by your Toyota dealer.
● Do not disassemble the sensor.
● Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor or surrounding area on
the bumper.
● Do not modify the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper.
● Do not paint the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper.

219

When driving

■ Handling the radar sensor

2-5. Driving information

Cargo and luggage
Take notice of the following information about storage precautions, cargo capacity and load:

● Stow cargo and luggage in the trunk whenever possible.
● Be sure all items are secured in place.
● To maintain vehicle balance while driving, position luggage
evenly within the luggage compartment.
● For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight.

Capacity and distribution
Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) - (Total weight of occupants)
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit⎯
(1)Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's
placard.
(2)Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
(3)Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4)The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 × 150) =
650 lbs.)
(5)Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being
loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

220

2-5. Driving information

(6)If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your
vehicle.
(→P. 472)
Toyota does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Your
vehicle is not designed for trailer towing.

Example based on your vehicle

When driving

Cargo capacity
Total load capacity

When 2 people with the combined weight of 366 lb. (166 kg) are
riding in your vehicle, which has a total load capacity of 905 lb. (410
kg), the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be
as follows:
905 lb. - 366 lb. = 539 lb. (410 kg -166 kg = 244 kg)
In this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of
388 lb. (176 kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be
reduced as follows:

539 lb. - 388 lb. = 151 lb. (244 kg - 176 kg = 68 kg)
As shown in the above example, if the number of occupants
increases, the cargo and luggage load will be reduced by an amount
that equals the increased weight due to the additional occupants. In
other words, if an increase in the number of occupants causes an
excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus
cargo and luggage load), you must reduce the cargo and luggage on
your vehicle.
221

2-5. Driving information

CAUTION
■ Things that must not be carried in the trunk

The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the trunk:
● Receptacles containing gasoline
● Aerosol cans
■ Storage precautions

Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Stow cargo and luggage in the trunk whenever possible.
● To prevent cargo and luggage from sliding forward during braking, do

not stack anything in the enlarged trunk. Keep cargo and luggage low,
as close to the floor as possible.
● When you fold down the rear seat, long items should not be place

directly behind the front seats.
● Never allow anyone to ride in the enlarged trunk. It is not designed for

passengers. They should ride in their seats with their seat belts properly fastened. Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer death or
serious bodily injury, in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving
or an accident.
● Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations as the

item may get under the brake or accelerator pedal and prevent the
pedals from being depressed properly, block the driver’s vision, or hit
the driver or passengers, causing an accident:
• At the feet of the driver
• On the front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items)
• On the package tray
• On the instrument panel
• On the dashboard
● Secure all items in the occupant compartment, as they may shift and
injure someone during sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

222

2-5. Driving information

CAUTION
■ Capacity and distribution
● Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle

weight rating.
● Even if the total load of occupant's weight and the cargo load is less

than the total load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly.
Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control which may cause death or serious injury.

When driving
223

2-5. Driving information

Vehicle load limits
Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity,
towing capacity and cargo capacity.

■ Total load capacity: 905 lb. (410 kg)
Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo
and luggage.

■ Seating capacity: 5 occupants (Front 2, Rear 3)
Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose
estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.

■ Towing capacity
Toyota does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle.

■ Cargo capacity
Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight
and the number of occupants.

■ Total load capacity and seating capacity

These details are also described on the tire and loading information
label. (→P. 373)

CAUTION
■ Overloading the vehicle

Do not overload the vehicle.
It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and
braking ability, resulting in an accident.

224

2-5. Driving information

Winter driving tips
Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving
the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the prevailing weather conditions.

■ Pre-winter preparations
● Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside temperatures.
• Engine oil
• Engine/power control unit coolant
• Washer fluid

● Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set
of tire chains for the front tires.
Ensure that all tires are the same size and brand, and that chains
match the size of the tires.

■ Before driving the vehicle
Perform the following according to the driving conditions:
● Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is
frozen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice.
Wipe away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.
● To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan,
remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents
in front of the windshield.
● Remove any ice that has accumulated on the vehicle chassis.
● Periodically check for and remove any excess ice or snow
that may have accumulated in the wheel well or on the
brakes.

225

When driving

● Have a service technician inspect the level and specific gravity of battery electrolyte.

2-5. Driving information

■ When driving the vehicle
Accelerate the vehicle slowly and drive at a reduced speed suitable to road conditions.
■ When parking the vehicle
Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P without setting the
parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it
from being released. If necessary, block the wheels to prevent
inadvertent sliding or creeping.

Selecting tire chains
Use the correct tire chain size when mounting the snow chains.
Chain size is regulated for each tire size.
Side chain:
0.12 in. (3 mm) in diameter
0.39 in. (10 mm) in width
1.18 in. (30 mm) in length
Cross chain:
0.16 in. (4 mm) in diameter
0.55 in. (14 mm) in width
0.98 in. (25 mm) in length
Regulations on the use of tire chains
Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary according to location and type of road. Always check local regulations before installing
chains.

226

2-5. Driving information

■ Tire chain installation
Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains:
● Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.
● Install tire chains on the front tires only. Do not install tire chains on the
rear tires.
● Install tire chains on front tires as tightly as possible. Retighten chains
after driving 1/4 ⎯ 1/2 mile (0.5 ⎯ 1.0 km).
2

● Install tire chains following the instructions provided with the tire chains.

■ Driving with snow tires
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failure to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or
serious injury.
● Use tires of the size specified.
● Maintain the recommended level of air pressure.
● Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of
snow tires being used.
● Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels.
■ Driving with tire chains
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failure to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely,
and may cause death or serious injury.
● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being
used, or 30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower.
● Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.
● Avoid sudden turns and braking, as use of chains may adversely affect
vehicle handling.
● Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle control is maintained.

227

When driving

CAUTION

2-5. Driving information

NOTICE
■ Repairing or replacing snow tires
Request repairs or replacement of snow tires from Toyota dealers or legitimate tire retailers.
This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation of the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters.
■ Fitting tire chains
The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function correctly
when tire chains are fitted.

228

2-5. Driving information

Trailer towing
Toyota does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle.
Toyota also does not recommend the installation of a tow hitch or
the use of a tow hitch carrier for a wheelchair, scooter, bicycle, etc.
Your vehicle is not designed for trailer towing or for the use of tow
hitch mounted carriers.

When driving
229

2-5. Driving information

Dinghy towing
Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on
the ground) behind a motor home.

NOTICE
■ To avoid serious damage to your vehicle
Do not tow your vehicle with the four wheels on the ground.

230

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Automatic air conditioning system
Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the
temperature setting.
Driver’s side temperature
setting display
Driver’s side
temperature control

Air outlet display
Front passenger’s side
temperature setting display

Fan speed
display

Front passenger’s side
temperature control

Automatic
mode

Off

Fan speed

“DUAL” button
Windshield defogger

Outside air or recirculated air mode

232

Cooling and dehumidification
function on/off button

Change the air outlets used

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Using the automatic air conditioning system
STEP 1

Press

The air conditioning system begins to operate. Air outlets and
fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.
STEP 2

Turn

clockwise to increase the temperature and turn
counterclockwise to decrease the temperature.

Adjusting the settings manually
STEP 1

To adjust the fan speed, press “>” on
to increase the
fan speed and “<” to decrease the fan speed.
Press

STEP 2

to turn the fan off.

To adjust the temperature setting, turn
increase the temperature and turn

clockwise to
counterclockwise to

decrease the temperature.
When

is pressed (the

indicator is on) or the passen-

ger’s side temperature control dial is turned, the temperature for the
driver and passenger seats can be adjusted separately.
STEP 3

To change the air outlets, press “<” or “>” on

The air outlets used are switched each time either side of the button
is pressed.

233

Interior features

When
is pressed (the
indicator is on) or the passenger’s side temperature control dial is turned, the temperature for the
driver and passenger seats can be adjusted separately.

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Defogging the windshield
Press

The dehumidification function
operates
and
fan
speed
increases.
Set the outside/recirculated air
mode button to the outside air
mode if the recirculated air mode
is used. (It may switch automatically.)
To defog the windshield and the
side windows early, turn the air
flow and temperature up.
To return to the previous mode,
press

again when the

windshield is defogged.

Air outlets and air flow
Air flows to the upper body.

: AVV50L-CEXGBA models only

234

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Air flows to the upper body and
feet.

: AVV50L-CEXGBA models only

Air flows to the feet.

the warming function is
operating, air flows to the
upper body as well to warm the
upper body effectively.

: AVV50L-CEXGBA models only

Air flows to the feet and the
windshield defogger operates.

: AVV50L-CEXGBA models only

Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Press

The mode switches between outside air mode (the indicator is off) and
recirculated air mode (the indicator is on) each time the button is
pressed.
235

Interior features

*: When

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets
Front center outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.

Front side outlets
Direct air flow to the left or
right, up or down.
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.

Rear outlets (if equipped)
Direct air flow to the left or
right, up or down.
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.

236

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

■ Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode
In Eco drive mode, the air conditioning system is controlled as follows to prioritize fuel efficiency:
● Engine speed and compressor operation controlled to restrict heating/
cooling capacity
● Fan speed restricted when automatic mode is selected
To improve air conditioning performance, perform the following operations:
● Adjust the fan speed
● Turn off Eco drive mode
■ Customization
The air conditioning control of Eco drive mode can be changed to the same
setting as that used in normal drive mode.
(Customizable features →P. 498)
Fan speed is adjusted automatically according to the temperature setting
and the ambient conditions.
Therefore, the fan may stop for a while until warm or cool air is ready to flow
immediately after

is pressed.

■ Fogging up of the windows
● The windows will easily fog up when the humidity in the vehicle is high.
Turning
on will dehumidify the air from the outlets and defog the
windshield effectively.
● If you turn

off, the windows may fog up more easily.

● The windows may fog up if the recirculated air mode is used.
■ Outside/recirculated air mode
● When driving on dusty roads such as tunnels or in heavy traffic, set the
outside/recirculated air mode button to the recirculated air mode. This is
effective in preventing outside air from entering the vehicle interior. During cooling operation, setting the recirculated air mode will also cool the
vehicle interior effectively.
● Outside/recirculated air mode may automatically switch depending on
the temperature setting or the inside temperature.
237

Interior features

■ Using automatic mode

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

■ When the outside temperature falls to nearly 32°F (0°C)
The dehumidification function may not operate even when
pressed.

■ Air conditioning odors
● During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter
into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause
odor to be emitted from the vents.
● To reduce potential odors from occurring:
• It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air
mode prior to turning the vehicle off.
• The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time
immediately after the air conditioning system is started in automatic
mode.
■ Air conditioning filter
→P. 380
■ Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e.g. air conditioning setting) can be changed.
(Customizable features →P. 498)

CAUTION
■ To prevent the windshield from fogging up
Do not use

during cool air operation in extremely humid weather.

The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the
windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking
your vision.

NOTICE
■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the
hybrid system is off.

238

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers
Defoggers are used to defog the rear window, and to remove raindrops, dew and frost from the outside rear view mirrors.

Turns the defoggers on/off
The defoggers will automatically turn off the operation
time. The operation time is
between 15 minutes and 1
hour depending on the ambient
temperature
and
vehicle
speed.
A
B

Vehicles without outside rear view mirror defoggers
Vehicles with outside rear view mirror defoggers

Interior features

■ The defoggers can be operated when
The “POWER” switch is in ON mode.
■ The outside rear view mirror defoggers (if equipped)
Turning the rear window defogger on will turn the outside rear view mirror
defoggers on.

CAUTION
■ When the outside rear view mirror defoggers are on (if equipped)
Do not touch the outside surface of the rear view mirrors, as they can
become very hot and burn you.

239

3-2. Using the audio system

Audio system types
Without navigation system and Display Audio system
CD player and AM/FM radio

Title

240

Page

Using the radio

P. 246

Using the CD player

P. 249

Playing back MP3 and WMA discs

P. 255

Operating an iPod

P. 262

Operating a USB memory

P. 270

Optimal use of the audio system

P. 278

Using the AUX port

P. 281

3-2. Using the audio system

With Display Audio system
Owners of models equipped with a Display Audio system should
refer to the “Display Audio System Owner's Manual”.

Display Audio system

Premium Display Audio system

Interior features

With navigation system
Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer
to the “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.

241

3-2. Using the audio system

■ About Bluetooth® (with Display Audio system)
The Bluetooth wordmark and logo are owned by Bluetooth SIG. and permission has been granted to use the trademark of the licensee Panasonic Corporation/Pioneer Corporation. Other trademarks and trade names are
owned by various different owners.

CAUTION
■ Certifications for the Bluetooth® (with Display Audio system)
FCC ID: ACJ932CQ-US70G0
IC ID: 216J-CQUS70G0
FCC ID: AJDK032
IC ID: 775E-K032
● FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
● Part 15 of the FCC Rules & Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s)
• Properly shielded a grounded cables and connectors must be used for
connection to host computer and/or peripherals in order to meet FCC
emission limits.
• This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with
any other antenna or transmitter.
• This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of this device.
• Le présent appareil est conforme aux la partie 15 des règles de la FCC
et CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1)
l’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur de
l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.

242

3-2. Using the audio system

CAUTION

243

Interior features

• This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation exposure limits set
forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65 and
RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without
maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable
that it should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20
cm or more away from person’s body (excluding extremities: hands,
wrists, feet and ankles).
• Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d’exposition aux
rayonnements énoncées pour un environnement non contrôlé et
respecte les règles les radioélectriques (RF) de la FCC lignes
directrices d’exposition dans le Supplément C à OET65 et d’exposition
aux fréquences radioélectriques (RF) CNR-102 de l’IC. Cet
équipement émet une énergie RF très faible qui est considérée
conforme sans évaluation de l’exposition maximale autorisée.
Cependant, cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé en gardant une
distance de 20 cm ou plus entre le dispositif rayonnant et le corps (à
l’exception des extrémités : mains, poignets, pieds et chevilles).
• Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only
operate using an antenna of a type and maximum (or lesser) gain
approved for the transmitter by Industry Canada. To reduce potential
radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should
be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is
not more than that necessary for successful communication.
• Conformément à la réglementation d’Industrie Canada, le présent
émetteur radio peut fonctionner avec une antenne d’un type et d’un
gain maximal (ou inférieur) approuvé pour l’émetteur par Industrie
Canada. Dans le but de réduire les risques de brouillage
radioélectrique à l’intention des autres utilisateurs, il faut choisir le type
d’antenne et son gain de sorte que la puissance isotrope rayonnée
équivalente (p.i.r.e.) ne dépasse pas l’intensité nécessaire à
l’établissement d’une communication satisfaisante.

3-2. Using the audio system

CAUTION
● Laser products
• Do not take this unit apart or attempt to make any changes yourself.
This is an intricate unit that uses a laser pickup to retrieve information
from the surface of compact discs. The laser is carefully shielded so
that its rays remain inside the cabinet. Therefore, never try to disassemble the player or alter any of its parts since you may be exposed to
laser rays and dangerous voltages.
• This product utilizes a laser.
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other
than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
THE USE OF OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH THIS PRODUCT WILL
INCREASE EYE HAZARD.

244

3-2. Using the audio system

NOTICE
■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary when the hybrid
system is off.
■ To avoid damaging the audio system
Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids over the audio system.

Interior features
245

3-2. Using the audio system

Using the radio

Power

Volume
Preset station selector

Adjusting the
frequency

Displaying
radio text
messages

Seeking the
frequency

Scanning for
receivable stations

AM/FM mode button

Setting station presets

STEP 1

Search for a desired station by turning
or

STEP 2

246

Press and hold a button (from
a beep.

or pressing

) until you hear

3-2. Using the audio system

Scanning radio stations
■ Scanning the preset radio stations
STEP 1

Press and hold

until you hear a beep.

Preset stations will be played for 5 seconds each.
STEP 2

When the desired station is reached, press

once

again.
■ Scanning all radio stations within range
3
STEP 1

Press

STEP 2

When the desired station is reached, press

once

again.
Switching the display

Press

Each time

is pressed, the display changes in the following order:

Frequency → Channel name → Radio text.

247

Interior features

All stations with reception will be played for 5 seconds each.

3-2. Using the audio system

■ Reception sensitivity
● Maintaining perfect radio reception at all times is difficult due to the continually changing position of the antenna, differences in signal strength
and surrounding objects, such as trains, transmitters, etc.
● The radio antenna is mounted inside the rear window. To maintain clear
radio reception, do not attach metallic window tinting or other metallic
objects to the antenna wire mounted inside the rear window.
■ Certifications for the radio tuner
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the
user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by trying one or more of
the following:
● Reorienting or relocating the receiving antenna.
● Increasing the separation between the equipment and receiver.
● Connecting the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
● Consulting the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

248

3-2. Using the audio system

Using the CD player

Selecting a track/
displaying track list

Volume

Power

Repeat play
Random
playback

Playback/pause

CD eject

Back button

Displaying
text
messages
3

Interior features

Searching playback
Selecting a track, fast-forwarding or reversing

Loading CDs
Insert a CD.
Ejecting CDs
Press

and remove the CD.

Selecting a track

Turn

or press

to move up or

to move down until

the desired track number is displayed.

249

3-2. Using the audio system

Selecting a track from a track list

STEP 1

Press

The track list will be displayed.
STEP 2

Turn and press

to select a track.

To return to the previous display, press

(

Scanning tracks

STEP 1

Press

The first 10 seconds of each track will be played.
To cancel, press

STEP 2

Press

again.

again when the desired track is reached.

Fast-forwarding and reversing tracks

Press and hold

Repeat play

Press

(RPT).

The current track is played repeatedly until
again.
250

(RPT) is pressed

3-2. Using the audio system

Random playback

Press

(RDM).

Tracks are played in a random order until

(RDM) is pressed again.

Playing and pausing tracks

Press

(

Switching the display

Each time

is pressed, the display changes in the following order:

Track no./Elapsed time → CD title → Track title → Artist name.
■ Display
Up to 12 characters can be displayed at a time.
If there are 13 characters or more, pressing and holding

for 1 sec-

ond or more will display the remaining characters.
A maximum of 24 characters can be displayed.
If

is pressed for 1 second or more again or has not been pressed for

6 seconds or more, the display will return to the first 12 characters.
Depending on the contents recorded, the characters may not be displayed
properly or may not be displayed at all.

251

Interior features

Press

3-2. Using the audio system

■ Error messages
“ERROR”:

This indicates a problem either in the CD or inside the player.

“CD CHECK”: The CD may be dirty, damaged or inserted up-side down.
“WAIT”:

Operation has stopped due to a high temperature inside the
player. Contact your Toyota dealer if the CD still cannot be
played.

■ Discs that can be used
Discs with the marks shown below can be used.
Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.

CDs with copy-protect features may not be used.
■ CD player protection feature
To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when
a problem is detected while the CD player is being used.
■ If a CD is left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for
extended periods
The CD may be damaged and may not play properly.
■ Lens cleaners
Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.

252

3-2. Using the audio system

NOTICE
■ CDs and adapters that cannot be used
Do not use the following types of CDs or 3 in. (8 cm) CD adapters or Dual
Disc.
Doing so may damage the CD player and/or the CD insert/eject function.
● CDs that have a diameter that is not 4.7
in. (12 cm)

● Low-quality and deformed CDs
Interior features

● CDs with a transparent or translucent
recording area

● CDs that have had tape, stickers or CDR labels attached to them, or that have
had the label peeled off

253

3-2. Using the audio system

NOTICE
■ CD player precautions
Failure to follow the precautions below may result in serious damage to the
CDs or the player itself.
● Do not insert anything other than CDs into the CD slot.
● Do not apply oil to the CD player.
● Store CDs away from direct sunlight.
● Never try to disassemble any part of the CD player.

254

3-2. Using the audio system

Playing back MP3 and WMA discs

Power

Volume

Selecting a file/
displaying folder lists

Repeat play
Random
playback

Playback/pause
Back button

CD eject

Displaying
text
messages

Searching
playback

3
Selecting a folder

Interior features

Selecting a file, fast-forwarding or reversing

Loading and ejecting MP3 and WMA discs
→P. 249
Selecting and scanning a folder
■ Selecting a folder
Press

to select the desired folder.

■ Returning to the first file of the first folder
Press and hold

until you hear a beep.

255

3-2. Using the audio system

■ Scanning the first file of all the folders
STEP 1

Press and hold

until you hear a beep.

The first 10 seconds of the first file in each folder will be played.
STEP 2

When the desired folder is reached, press

again.

■ Selecting a folder and file from folder lists
STEP 1

Press

The folder list will be displayed.
STEP 2

Turn and press

to select a folder and a file.

To return to the previous display, press

(

Selecting and scanning files
■ Selecting a file
Turn

or press

to select the desired file.

■ Scanning the files in a folder
STEP 1

Press

The first 10 seconds of each file will be played.
STEP 2

256

When the desired file is reached, press

again.

3-2. Using the audio system

Fast-forwarding and reversing files

Press and hold

Repeat play

Pressing

(RPT) changes modes in the following order:

File repeat → Folder repeat* → Off.
*: Available except when RDM (random playback) is selected

Pressing

Interior features

Random playback

(RDM) changes modes in the following order:

Folder random → Disc random → Off.
Playing and pausing files

Press

(

Switching the display

Press

Each time

is pressed, the display changes in the following order:

Track no./Elapsed time → Folder name → File name → Album title (MP3
only) → Track title → Artist name.
257

3-2. Using the audio system

■ Display
→P. 251
■ Canceling random and repeat playback
Press

(RPT) or

(RDM), or press and hold

■ Error messages
“ERROR”:

This indicates a problem either in the CD or inside the
player.

“CD CHECK”:

The CD may be dirty, damaged or inserted up-side down.

“WAIT”:

Operation has stopped due to a high temperature inside
the player. Contact your Toyota dealer if the CD still cannot
be played.

“NO SUPPORT”: This indicates that MP3/WMA files are not included in the
CD.
■ Discs that can be used
Discs with the marks shown below can be used.
Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.

■ CD player protection feature
To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when
a problem is detected while the CD player is being used.
■ If a CD is left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for
extended periods
The CD may be damaged and may not play properly.

258

3-2. Using the audio system

■ Lens cleaners
Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.
■ MP3 and WMA files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using
MP3 compression.
WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3
format.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards and to the media/formats
recorded by them that can be used.
● MP3 file compatibility

• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9
• Compatible sampling frequencies
32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates
Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192 (kbps)
Ver. 9: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320 (kbps)
*
Only compatible with 2-channel playback

259

Interior features

• Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates
MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 40, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224,
256, 320 (kbps)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128,
144, 160 (kbps)
*
Compatible with VBR
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and
monaural
● WMA file compatibility

3-2. Using the audio system

● Compatible media
Media that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback are CD-Rs and CDRWs.
Playback in some instances may not be possible, depending on the status
of the CD-R or CD-RW. Playback may not be possible or the audio may
jump if the disc is scratched or marked with fingerprints.
● Compatible disc formats
The following disc formats can be used.
• Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2
CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2
• File formats: ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet)
MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above
may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not
be displayed correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows.
• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels
• Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters
• Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files per disc: 255
● File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those
with the extension .mp3 or .wma.
● Multi-sessions
As the audio system is compatible with multi-sessions, it is possible to play
discs that contain MP3 and WMA files. However, only the first session can
be played.
● ID3 and WMA tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track
title, artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags.
(The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the
track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.

260

3-2. Using the audio system

● MP3 and WMA playback
When a disc containing MP3 or WMA files is inserted, all files on the disc
are first checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file
is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you
do not write in any files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnecessary folders.
If the discs contain a mixture of music data and MP3 or WMA format data,
only music data can be played.
● Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and
WMA files, they will be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and
WMA files. This may result in large amounts of interference and damage
to the speakers.
● Playback

NOTICE
■ CDs and adapters that cannot be used (→P. 253)
■ CD player precautions (→P. 254)

261

Interior features

• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit
rate of 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances,
depending on the characteristics of the disc.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for
MP3 and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the
encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of
playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at
all.
• When files other than MP3 or WMA files are recorded on a disc, it may
take more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback may
not be possible at all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.

3-2. Using the audio system

Operating an iPod
Connecting an iPod enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle
speakers.

■ Connecting an iPod
STEP 1

Push the lid.

STEP 2

Open the cover and connect
an iPod using an iPod cable.
Turn on the power of the iPod if
it is not turned on.

STEP 3

262

Press

repeatedly until “iPod” is displayed.

3-2. Using the audio system

■ Control panel
Power

Volume

iPod menu mode/back button
Shuffle playback
Playback/pause

iPod menu/selecting a
song/displaying lists

Repeat play

Displaying
text
messages

Interior features

Play button
Selecting a song, fast-forwarding or reversing

Selecting a play mode

STEP 1

Press

STEP 2

Turning

(BROWSE) to select iPod menu mode.

clockwise changes the play mode in the fol-

lowing order:
“Playlists”→“Artists”→“Albums”→“Songs”→“Podcasts”→“Genres”
→“Composers”→“Audiobooks”
STEP 3

Press

to select the desired play mode.

(PLAY) to enter the displayed selection.
263

3-2. Using the audio system

■ Play mode list
First
selection

Play mode

Second
selection

Third
selection

Fourth
selection

Songs
select

“Playlists”

Playlists
select

Songs
select

“Artists”

Artists select

Albums
select

“Albums”

Albums
select

Songs
select

“Songs”

Songs select

“Podcasts”

Podcasts
select

Episodes
select

“Genres”

Genre select

Artists select

Albums
select

“Composers”

Composers
select

Albums
select

Songs
select

“Audiobooks”

Audiobooks
select

Chapters
select

Songs
select

■ Selecting a list
STEP 1

Turn

STEP 2

Press

to display the first selection list.

to select the desired item.

Pressing the knob changes to the second selection list.
STEP 3

Repeat the same procedure to select the desired item.
To return to the previous selection list, press

264

(

3-2. Using the audio system

Selecting songs

Turn

or press

to select the desired song.

Selecting a song from the song list

STEP 1

Press

The song list will be displayed.

Turn

STEP 3

Press

to select a song.

Interior features

STEP 2

to play the song.

To return to the previous display, press

(

Fast-forwarding and reversing songs

Press and hold

Repeat play

Press

(RPT).

To cancel, press

(RPT) again.

265

3-2. Using the audio system

Shuffle playback

Pressing

(RDM) changes modes in the following order:

Track shuffle → Album shuffle → Off.
Playing and pausing songs

Press

(

Switching the display

Press

Each time

is pressed, the display changes in the following order:

Track no./Elapsed time → Album name → Track title → Artist name.

■ About iPod

● “Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod, or iPhone,
respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards.

266

3-2. Using the audio system

● Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance
with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this
accessory with iPod or iPhone may affect wireless performance.
● iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano and iPod touch are trademarks of
Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
■ iPod functions
● When an iPod is connected and the audio source is changed to iPod
mode, the iPod will resume play from the same point in which it was last
used.
● Depending on the iPod that is connected to the system, certain functions
may not be available. If a function is unavailable due to a malfunction (as
opposed to a system specification), disconnecting the device and reconnecting it once again may resolve the problem.

● When the battery level of an iPod is very low, the iPod may not operate. If
so, charge the iPod before use.
● Supported models (→P. 268)
■ iPod problems
To resolve most problems encountered when using your iPod, disconnect
your iPod from the vehicle iPod connection and reset it.
For instructions on how to reset your iPod, refer to your iPod Owner’s Manual.
■ Display
→P. 251

267

Interior features

● While connected to the system, the iPod cannot be operated with its own
controls. It is necessary to use the controls of the vehicle’s audio system
instead.

3-2. Using the audio system

■ Error messages
“ERROR 1”:

This indicates that the data in the iPod cannot be read.

“ERROR 3”:

This indicates that the iPod may be malfunctioning.

“ERROR 4”:

This indicates that an over current error has occurred.

“ERROR 5”:

This indicates that an iPod communication error has
occurred.

“ERROR 6”:

This indicates that an authentication error has occurred.

“NO SONGS”:

This indicates that there is no music data in the iPod.

“NO PLAYLISTS”: This indicates that some available songs are not found in
a selected playlist.
“UPDATE”:

This indicates that the version of the iPod is not compatible. Upgrade your iPod software to the latest version.

■ Compatible models
The following iPod®, iPod nano®, iPod classic®, iPod touch® and iPhone®
devices can be used with this system.
● Made for
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

268

iPod touch (4th generation)
iPod touch (3rd generation)
iPod touch (2nd generation)
iPod touch (1st generation)
iPod classic
iPod with video
iPod nano (6th generation)
iPod nano (5th generation)
iPod nano (4th generation)
iPod nano (3rd generation)
iPod nano (2nd generation)
iPod nano (1st generation)
iPhone 4
iPhone 3GS
iPhone 3G
iPhone

3-2. Using the audio system

Depending on differences between models or software versions etc., some
models might be incompatible with this system.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
● Maximum number of lists in device: 9999
● Maximum number of songs in device: 65535
● Maximum number of songs per list: 65535

CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Do not connect iPod or operate the controls.
3

NOTICE

Depending on the size and shape of the iPod that is connected to the system, the auxiliary box lid may not close fully. In this case, do not forcibly
close the lid as this may damage the iPod or the terminal, etc.
■ To prevent damage to iPod
● Do not leave iPod in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may
become high, resulting in damage to the iPod.
● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the iPod while it is
connected as this may damage the iPod or its terminal.
● Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the iPod or
its terminal.

269

Interior features

■ If the auxiliary box lid cannot be fully closed

3-2. Using the audio system

Operating a USB memory
Connecting a USB memory enables you to enjoy music from the
vehicle speakers.

■ Connecting a USB memory
STEP 1

Push the lid.

STEP 2

Open the cover and connect a
USB memory.
Turn on the power of the USB
memory if it is not turned on.

STEP 3

270

Press

repeatedly until “USB” is displayed.

3-2. Using the audio system

■ Control panel
Power

Volume
Random
playback

Playback/pause

Selecting a file/
displaying folder lists

Back button
Repeat play

Searching
playback

Displaying
text
messages

Interior features

Selecting a folder
Selecting a file, fast-forwarding or reversing

Selecting and scanning a folder
■ Selecting a folder
Press

to select the desired folder.

■ Returning to the first file of the first folder
Press and hold

until you hear a beep.

271

3-2. Using the audio system

■ Scanning the first file of all the folders
STEP 1

Press and hold

until you hear a beep.

The first 10 seconds of the first file in each folder will be played.
STEP 2

When the desired folder is reached, press

again.

■ Selecting from folder lists
STEP 1

Press

The folder list will be displayed.
STEP 2

Turn and press

to select a folder and a file.

To return to the previous display, press

(

Selecting and scanning files
■ Selecting a file
Turn

or press

to select the desired file.

■ Scanning the files in a folder
STEP 1

Press

The first 10 seconds of each file will be played.
STEP 2

272

When the desired file is reached, press

again.

3-2. Using the audio system

Fast-forwarding and reversing files

Press and hold

Repeat play

Pressing

(RPT) changes modes in the following order:

File repeat → Folder repeat* → Off.
*: Available except when RDM (random playback) is selected

Pressing

Interior features

Random playback

(RDM) changes modes in the following order:

1 folder random → All folders random → Off.
Playing and pausing files

Press

(

Switching the display

Press

Each time

is pressed, the display changes in the following order:

Track no./Elapsed time → Folder name → File name → Album title (MP3
only) → Track title → Artist name.
273

3-2. Using the audio system

■ USB memory functions
● Depending on the USB memory that is connected to the system, the
device itself may not be operable and certain functions may not be available. If the device is inoperable or a function is unavailable due to a malfunction (as opposed to a system specification), disconnecting the device
and reconnecting it once again may resolve the problem.
● If the USB memory still does not begin operation after being disconnected and reconnected, format the memory.
■ Display
→P. 251
■ Error messages
“ERROR”:

This indicates a problem in the USB memory or its connection.

“NO MUSIC”: This indicates that no MP3/WMA files are included in the USB
memory.
■ USB memory
● Compatible devices
USB memory that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback
● Compatible device formats
The following device formats can be used:
• USB communication formats: USB2.0 FS (12 Mbps)
• File formats: FAT12/16/32 (Windows)
• Correspondence class: Mass storage class
MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above
may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be
displayed correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
•
•
•
•

274

Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels
Maximum number of folders in a device: 999 (including the root)
Maximum number of files in a device: 9999
Maximum number of files per folder: 255

3-2. Using the audio system

● MP3 and WMA files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size using
MP3 compression.
WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3
format.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and
to the media/formats on which the files are recorded.
● MP3 file compatibility

• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9
• Compatible sampling frequencies
HIGH PROFILE 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates
HIGH PROFILE 48-320 (kbps, CBR)
● File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those
with the extension .mp3 or .wma.

275

Interior features

• Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERIII, MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERIII, MPEG2.5)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERIII: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERIII: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
MPEG2.5: 8, 11.025, 12 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-320 (kbps)
MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 8-160 (kbps)
MPEG2.5: 8-160 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and
monaural
● WMA file compatibility

3-2. Using the audio system

● ID3 and WMA tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track
title, artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3, 2.4 ID3
tags. (The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the
track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
● MP3 and WMA playback
• When a device containing MP3 or WMA files is connected, all files in
the USB memory are checked. Once the file check is finished, the first
MP3 or WMA file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly,
we recommend that you do not include any files other than MP3 or
WMA files or create any unnecessary folders.
• When the USB memory is connected and the audio source is changed
to USB memory mode, the USB memory will start playing the first file in
the first folder. If the same device is removed and reinserted (and the
contents have not been changed), the USB memory will resume play
from the same point in which it was last used.
● Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and
WMA files, they will be skipped (not played).
● Playback
• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit
rate of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for
MP3 and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the
encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of
playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at
all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.

CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Do not connect USB memory or operate the controls.
276

3-2. Using the audio system

NOTICE
■ If the auxiliary box lid cannot be fully closed
Depending on the size and shape of the USB memory that is connected to
the system, the auxiliary box lid may not close fully. In this case, do not forcibly close the lid as this may damage the USB memory or the terminal, etc.
■ To prevent damage to USB memory
● Do not leave USB memory in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the player.
● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the USB memory
while it is connected as this may damage the USB memory or its terminal.
● Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the USB
memory or its terminal.

Interior features
277

3-2. Using the audio system

Optimal use of the audio system
Displays the current mode
Changes the following setting
• Sound quality and volume
balance (→P. 279)
The sound quality and balance setting can be changed
to produce the best sound.

• Automatic Sound Levelizer
(→P. 279)
Selecting the mode

Using the audio control function
■ Changing sound quality modes
STEP 1

Press

STEP 2

Turn

STEP 3

Press

STEP 4

Turn

.
to select “SOUND”.

to select the desired mode.

“BAS”, “TRE”, “FAD”, “BAL”, or “ASL”
STEP 5

278

Press

3-2. Using the audio system

■ Adjusting sound quality
Turning

adjusts the level.

Sound quality mode

Mode
displayed

Level

Bass*

“BAS”

-5 to 5

Treble*

“TRE”

-5 to 5

Front/rear
volume
balance

“FAD”

F7 to R7

Turn to the
right

Low

High

Shifts to rear Shifts to front
3

“BAL”

L7 to R7

Shifts to left

Shifts to right

*: The sound quality level is adjusted individually in each audio mode.

■ Adjusting the Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL)
When ASL is selected, turn

to select the desired mode.

Once the desired mode has been selected, press

“ASL LOW”, “ASL MID”, “ASL HIGH”, or “ASL OFF”
ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to vehicle speed.

279

Interior features

Left/right
volume
balance

Turn to the
left

3-2. Using the audio system

■ Trademark owned by SRS Labs, Inc.

The audio systems utilize SRS FOCUS® and SRS TruBass® audio
enhancement technologies, under license from SRS Labs, Inc., in all modes
except AM radio mode.
FOCUS, TruBass, SRS and

symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs,

Inc.
FOCUS and TruBass technologies are incorporated under license from
SRS Labs, Inc.
TruBass® enhances the perception of bass frequencies to provide deep, rich
bass response from any size speaker.
SRS FOCUS® raises the audio image from non-optimally placed speakers
up to the natural listening height at ear level.

280

3-2. Using the audio system

Using the AUX port
This port can be used to connect a portable audio device and listen
to it through the vehicle’s speakers.
STEP 1

Push the lid.

STEP 2

Open the cover and connect
the portable audio device.

Interior features

STEP 3

Press

repeatedly until “AUX” is displayed.

■ Operating portable audio devices connected to the audio system
The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle's audio controls. All other
adjustments must be made on the portable audio device itself.
■ When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet
Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable
audio device.

281

3-2. Using the audio system

NOTICE
■ If the auxiliary box lid cannot be fully closed
Depending on the size and shape of the portable audio device that is connected to the system, the auxiliary box lid may not close fully. In this case, do
not forcibly close the lid as this may damage the portable audio device or the
terminal, etc.

282

3-2. Using the audio system

Using the steering wheel audio switches
Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the
steering wheel.

Volume
Radio mode: Selects radio
stations
CD mode: Selects tracks
and files (MP3 and WMA)
iPod mode: Selects a song
USB
memory
mode:
Selects a file and folder

Press and hold: Mute

Turning on the power
Press

when the audio system is turned off.

Changing the audio source
Press

when the audio system is turned on. The audio source

changes as follows each time

is pressed.

AM → FM1 → FM2 → CD mode → iPod or USB memory mode → AUX

283

Interior features

Press: Power on, selects an
audio source

3-2. Using the audio system

Adjusting the volume

Press “+” on

to increase the volume and “-” to decrease the

volume.

Hold down “+” or “-” on

to continue increasing or decreasing the

volume.

Silencing a sound
Press and hold

To cancel, press and hold

again.

Selecting a radio station
STEP 1

Press

to select the radio mode.

STEP 2

Press

to select a preset station.

To scan for receivable stations, press and hold

until

you hear a beep.

Selecting a track/file or song
STEP 1

Press

to select CD, iPod or USB memory mode.

STEP 2

Press

284

to select the desired track/file or song.

3-2. Using the audio system

Selecting a folder (MP3 and WMA or USB memory)
STEP 1

Press

STEP 2

Press and hold

to select CD or USB memory mode.
or

until you hear a beep.

CAUTION
■ To reduce the risk of an accident
Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.

Interior features
285

3-3. Using the interior lights

Interior lights list

Interior/rear personal lights (vehicles with moon roof)
(→P. 287, 288)
Interior light (vehicles without moon roof) (→P. 287, 288)
Interior/front personal lights (vehicles with moon roof) or personal lights (vehicles without moon roof) (→P. 287, 288)
Shift lever light (when the tail lights are on) (vehicles with moon
roof)
“POWER” switch light
Door courtesy lights

286

3-3. Using the interior lights
Interior lights

Interior lights
Vehicles without moon roof
Turns the lights on
Turns the door position on
Turns the lights off

Vehicles with moon roof

Turns the lights on/off

287

Interior features

Turns the lights on/off linked to
door positions.

3-3. Using the interior lights
Personal lights

Personal lights
Front
Turns the lights on/off

Rear (vehicles with moon roof)
Turns the lights on/off

■ Illuminated entry system
The lights automatically turn on/off according to “POWER” switch mode, the
presence of the electronic key, whether the doors are locked/unlocked, and
whether the doors are open/closed.
■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
If the interior lights, personal lights and/or door courtesy lights are left on
when the “POWER” switch is turned off, the lights will go off automatically
after 20 minutes.
■ Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e.g. The time elapsed before lights turn off) can be changed.
(Customizable features →P. 498)

288

3-4. Using the storage features

List of storage features

Interior features

Auxiliary boxes
Glove box
Bottle holders/door pockets
Cup holders
Console box
Coin holder

CAUTION
■ Items that should not be left in the storage spaces
Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this
may cause the following when cabin temperature becomes high:
● Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact
with other stored items.
● Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into contact with other
stored items, the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas,
causing a fire hazard.
289

3-4. Using the storage features
Glove box

Glove box
The glove box can be opened by pressing the lock release button,
locked and unlocked using the mechanical key.
Open
Lock
Unlock

CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Keep the glove box closed. In the event of sudden braking or sudden swerving, an accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by the open
glove box or the items stored inside.

290

3-4. Using the storage features
Console box

Console box
Lift the lid while pulling up the
lever to release the lock.

■ When using the console box lid as an armrest

The lid can also be opened from the forwardmost position.

CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Keep the console box closed. In the event of sudden braking, an accident
may occur due to an occupant being struck by the open console box or the
items stored inside.

291

Interior features

Slide the console box lid forward as
needed. Slide the lid forward while pulling
up the lever.

3-4. Using the storage features
Coin holder

Coin holder
Pull the lid down while pressing
down the button.

CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Keep the coin holder closed. In the event of sudden braking, an accident
may occur due to an occupant being struck by the open coin holder or the
items stored inside.

292

3-4. Using the storage features
Bottle holders

Bottle holders
Front

Rear

Interior features

■ When using the holder as a bottle holder
● When storing a bottle, close the cap.
● The bottle may not be stored depending on its size or shape.

CAUTION
■ Items unsuitable for the bottle holder
Do not place anything other than a bottle in the bottle holders.
Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or
sudden braking and cause injury.

293

3-4. Using the storage features
Bottle holders and cup holders

NOTICE
■ Items that should not be stowed in the bottle holders
Put the cap on before stowing a bottle. Do not place open bottles in the bottle holders, or glasses and paper cups containing liquid. The contents may
spill and glasses may break.

Cup holders
Front

Rear
Pull the armrest down.

294

3-4. Using the storage features
Cup holders

■ Cup holder insert
Cup holder insert can be removed.

CAUTION
3

■ Items unsuitable for the cup holder

295

Interior features

Do not place anything other than cups or aluminum cans in the cup holders.
Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or
sudden braking, causing injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns.

3-4. Using the storage features
Auxiliary boxes

Auxiliary boxes
Type A
Push the lid.

Type B
Push the lid.

Type C (if equipped)
Lift the lid.

296

3-4. Using the storage features
Auxiliary boxes

CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Keep the auxiliary boxes closed. In the event of sudden braking, an accident
may occur due to an occupant being struck by an open auxiliary box or the
items stored inside.
■ Items unsuitable for storing (type A only)
Do not store items heavier than 0.4 lb. (0.2 kg).
Doing so may cause the auxiliary box to open and the items inside may fall
out, resulting in an accident.

Interior features
297

3-5. Other interior features

Sun visors
To set the visor in the forward position, flip it down.
To set the visor in the side
position, flip down, unhook,
and swing it to the side.
To use the side extender,
place the visor in the side
position, then slide it backward.

298

3-5. Other interior features

Vanity mirrors
Slide the cover to open.
Vehicles with vanity lights: The
light turns on when the cover is
opened.

■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge (vehicles with vanity lights)

If the vanity lights remain on for 20 minutes while the hybrid system is off, the
lights will turn off automatically.
Interior features
299

3-5. Other interior features

Clock
Adjusts the hours
Adjusts the minutes

■ The clock is displayed when
The “POWER” switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode.
■ When the 12-volt battery is disconnected
The time display will automatically be set to 1:00.

300

3-5. Other interior features

Outside temperature display
The temperature display shows temperatures within the range of
-40°F (-40°C) and 122°F (50°C).

The “POWER” switch is in ON mode.
■ Display
In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be displayed, or the display may take longer than normal to change:
● When the vehicle is stopped, or moving at low speeds (less than 16 mph
[25 km/h])
● When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/
exit of a garage, tunnel, etc.)
■ When “E” is displayed
The system may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

301

Interior features

■ The outside temperature is displayed when

3-5. Other interior features

Ashtray∗

An ashtray can be installed in
the cup holder. (→P. 294)

CAUTION
■ When not in use
Keep the ashtray closed. In the event of sudden braking, an accident may
occur due to an occupant being struck by the open ashtray or ash flying out.
■ To prevent fire
● Fully extinguish matches and cigarettes before putting them in the ashtray,
then make sure the ashtray is fully closed.
● Do not place paper or any other type of flammable object in the ashtray.

∗: If equipped
302

3-5. Other interior features

Power outlets
The power outlet can be used for 12 V accessories that run on less
than 10 A.

Instrument cluster

Interior features
303

3-5. Other interior features

Center console (if equipped)

■ The power outlet can be used when
The “POWER” switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode.

NOTICE
■ To avoid damaging the power outlet
Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use.
Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short circuit.
■ To prevent blown fuse
Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V 10 A.
■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the hybrid system
is off.
304

3-5. Other interior features

Seat heaters∗

On
The indicator light comes on.

Adjusts the seat temperature
The further you move the dial
forward, the warmer the seat
becomes.
Driver’s seat

Front
passenger’s seat

Interior features

■ The seat heaters can be used when
The “POWER” switch is in ON mode.
■ When not in use
Move the dial fully backward. The indicator light turns off.

∗: If equipped
305

3-5. Other interior features

CAUTION
■ Burns
● Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat
heater on to avoid the possibility of burns:
• Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the physically challenged
• Persons with sensitive skin
• Persons who are fatigued
• Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping
drugs, cold remedies, etc.)
● Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater.
Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature
of the seat and may lead to overheating.
● Do not use the seat heater more than necessary. Doing so may cause
minor burns or overheating.

NOTICE
■ To prevent seat heater damage
Do not put heavy objects that have an uneven surface on the seat and do
not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.
■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Turn the seat heaters off when the hybrid system is off.

306

3-5. Other interior features

Armrest
Fold down the armrest for use.

NOTICE
3

■ To prevent damage to the armrest
Do not apply too much load on the armrest.

Interior features
307

3-5. Other interior features

Coat hooks

CAUTION
■ Items that cannot be hung on the coat hook
Do not hang coat hangers or other hard or sharp objects on the hook. If the
SRS curtain shield airbags deploy, these items may become projectiles,
causing death or serious injury.

308

3-5. Other interior features

Floor mat
Use only floor mats designed specifically for vehicles of the same
model and model year as your vehicle. Fix them securely in place
onto the carpet.
STEP 1

Insert the retaining hooks
(clips) into the floor mat eyelets.

STEP 2

Turn the upper knob of each
retaining hook (clip) to secure
the floor mats in place.

*: Always align the ∆ marks.

The shape of the retaining hooks (clips) may differ from that shown in the
illustration.

309

Interior features

3-5. Other interior features

CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause the driver's floor mat to slip, possibly interfering
with the pedals while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it may
become difficult to stop the vehicle, leading to a serious accident.
■ When installing the driver's floor mat
● Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year
vehicles, even if they are Toyota Genuine floor mats.
● Only use floor mats designed for the driver's seat.
● Always install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips) provided.
● Do not use two or more floor mats on top of each other.
● Do not place the floor mat bottom-side up or upside-down.
■ Before driving
● Check that the floor mat is securely
fixed in the correct place with all the
provided retaining hooks (clips). Be
especially careful to perform this check
after cleaning the floor.
● With the hybrid system stopped and the
shift lever in P, fully depress each pedal
to the floor to make sure it does not
interfere with the floor mat.

310

3-5. Other interior features

Trunk features
■ Grocery bag hooks

Interior features
311

3-5. Other interior features

■ Cargo net (if equipped)

NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the hooks
Do not apply too much load to the hooks.

312

3-5. Other interior features

Garage door opener∗
The garage door opener can be programmed to operate garage
doors, gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, security systems, and other devices.
The garage door opener (HomeLink® Universal Transceiver) is manufactured under license from HomeLink®.

Programming HomeLink® (for U.S. owners)
The HomeLink® compatible transceiver in your vehicle has 3 buttons
which can be programmed to operate 3 different devices. Refer to the
programming method below appropriate for the device.

Buttons
Interior features

Indicator

∗: If equipped
313

3-5. Other interior features

■ Programming the HomeLink®
STEP 1

Point the remote control transmitter for the device 1 to 3 in. (25
to 75 mm) from the HomeLink®
control buttons.
Keep the HomeLink® indicator
light in view while programming.

STEP 2

Press and hold one of the
HomeLink® buttons and the
transmitter button. When the
HomeLink®
indicator
light
changes from a slow to a rapid
flash, you can release both buttons.
If the HomeLink® indicator light
comes on but does not flash, or
flashes rapidly for 2 seconds and
remains lit, the HomeLink® button
is already programmed. Use the
other buttons or follow the
“Reprogramming a HomeLink®
button” instructions. (→P. 317)

314

3-5. Other interior features

Test the HomeLink® operation
by pressing the newly programmed button.

STEP 3

STEP 4

Repeat the steps above to program another device for any of
the remaining HomeLink® buttons.

■ Programming a Rolling Code system (for U.S. owners)
If your device is Rolling Code equipped, follow the steps under the
heading “Programming HomeLink®” before proceeding with the
steps listed below.
STEP 1

Locate the learn button on the ceiling mounted garage door
opener motor. The exact location and color of the button may
vary by brand of garage door opener motor.
Refer to the operation manual supplied with the garage door opener
motor for the location of the learn button.

STEP 2

Press the learn button.
Following this step, you have 30 seconds in which to initiate step 3
below.

315

Interior features

If a HomeLink® button has been
programmed for a garage door,
check to see if the garage door
opens and closes. If the garage
door does not operate, see if your
remote control transmitter is of
the rolling code type. Press and
hold the programmed HomeLink®
button. The remote control transmitter is of the rolling code type if
the HomeLink® indicator light
flashes rapidly for 2 seconds and
then remains lit. If your transmitter is of the rolling code type, proceed
to
the
heading
“Programming a rolling code system”.

3-5. Other interior features

STEP 3

Press and hold the vehicle’s programmed HomeLink® button
for 2 seconds and then release it. Repeat this step once
again. The garage door may open.
If the garage door opens, the programming process is complete. If
the door does not open, press and release the button a third time.
This third press and release will complete the programming process
by opening the garage door.
The ceiling mounted garage door opener motor should now recognize the HomeLink® signal and operate the garage door.

STEP 4

Repeat the steps above to program another rolling code system for any of the remaining HomeLink® buttons.

■ Programming an entry gate (for U.S. owners)/Programming a
device in the Canadian market
STEP 1

Place the remote control transmitter 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm)
away from the HomeLink® buttons.
Keep the HomeLink® indicator light in view while programming.

STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5

STEP 6

Press and hold the selected HomeLink® button.
Repeatedly press and release (cycle) the remote control
transmitter for 2 seconds each until step 4 is completed.
When the HomeLink® indicator light starts to flash rapidly,
release the buttons.
Test the HomeLink® operation by pressing the newly programmed button. Check to see if the gate/device operates
correctly.
Repeat the steps above to program another device for any of
the remaining HomeLink® buttons.

■ Programming other devices
To program other devices such as home security systems, home
door locks or lighting, contact your Toyota dealer for assistance.
■ Reprogramming a button

The individual HomeLink® buttons cannot be erased but can be
reprogrammed. To reprogram a button, follow the “Reprogramming
a HomeLink® button” instructions.

316

3-5. Other interior features

Operating HomeLink®
Press the appropriate HomeLink® button. The HomeLink® indicator
light should come on.
The HomeLink® compatible transceiver in your vehicle continues to send
a signal for up to 20 seconds as long as the button is pressed.

Reprogramming a HomeLink® button
Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button. After 20 seconds, the
HomeLink® indicator light will start flashing slowly. Keep pressing the
HomeLink® button and press and hold the transmitter button until the
HomeLink® indicator light changes from a slow to a rapid flash.
Release the buttons.

Press and hold the 2 outside buttons for 10 seconds until the indicator light flashes.
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to
erase the programs stored in the
HomeLink® memory.

317

Interior features

Erasing the entire HomeLink® memory (all three programs)

3-5. Other interior features

■ Before programming
● Install a new battery in the remote control transmitter.
● The battery side of the remote control transmitter must be pointed away
from the HomeLink® button.
■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
HomeLink® will turn off if a door has not been opened and closed for 20 minutes or the “POWER” switch is left turned off. (After which programming cannot be completed.) Open and close a door or turn the “POWER” switch to
ACCESSORY mode to turn HomeLink® on. We recommend programming
while the “POWER” switch is in ACCESSORY mode.
■ Certification for the garage door opener
U.S.A.
FCC ID: CB2051AHL4/CB251AHL4NR
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
■ When support is necessary
Visit on the web at www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

318

3-5. Other interior features

CAUTION
■ When programming a garage door or other remote control devices
The garage door or other devices may operate, so ensure people and
objects are out of danger to prevent potential harm.
■ Conforming to federal safety standards
Do not use the HomeLink® compatible transceiver with any garage door
opener or device that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by
federal safety standards.
This includes any garage door that cannot detect an interfering object. A
door or device without these features increases the risk of death or serious
injury.
3

Interior features
319

3-5. Other interior features

Compass∗

The compass on the inside rear view mirror indicates the direction in
which the vehicle is heading.

■ Operation
To turn the compass on or off,
press “AUTO” for more than 3
seconds.

■ Displays and directions
Display

Direction

North

Northeast

East

Southeast

South

Southwest

West

Northwest

∗: If equipped
320

3-5. Other interior features

Calibrating the compass

If you cross over one of the map boundaries shown in illustration, the
compass will deviate.
To obtain higher precision or perfect calibration, refer to “Deviation calibration”.

■ Deviation calibration
STEP 1
STEP 2

Stop the vehicle.
Press and hold “AUTO”.
A number (1 to 15) appears on
the compass display.

321

Interior features

The direction display deviates from the true direction determined by
the earth’s magnetic field. The amount of deviation varies depending
on the geographic position of the vehicle.

3-5. Other interior features

STEP 3

Referring to the map above, press “AUTO” to select the number of the zone you are in.
If the direction is displayed several seconds after adjustment, the
calibration is complete.

■ Circling calibration
When “C” appears on the display, drive the vehicle at 5 mph
(8 km/h) or less in a circle until a
direction is displayed.
If there is not enough space to
drive in a circle, drive around the
block until a direction is displayed.

■ Conditions unfavorable to correct operation
The compass may not show the correct direction in the following conditions:
● The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning.
● The vehicle is on an inclined surface.
● The vehicle is in a place where the earth's magnetic field is subject to
interference by artificial magnetic fields (underground car park/parking
lot, under a steel tower, between buildings, roof car park/parking lot, near
an intersection, near a large vehicle, etc.).
● The vehicle has become magnetized.
(There is a magnet or metal object near the inside rear view mirror.)
● The battery has been disconnected.
● A door is open.

322

3-5. Other interior features

CAUTION
■ While driving the vehicle
Do not adjust the display. Adjust the display only when the vehicle is
stopped.
■ When doing the circling calibration
Secure a wide space, and watch out for people and vehicles in the vicinity.
Do not violate any local traffic rules while performing circling calibration.

NOTICE
■ To avoid compass malfunctions
Do not place magnets or any metal objects near the inside rear view mirror.
Doing this may cause the compass sensor to malfunction.
● Do not perform a circling calibration of the compass in a place where the
earth's magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields.
● During calibration, do not operate electric systems (moon roof, power windows, etc.) as they may interfere with the calibration.

323

Interior features

■ To ensure normal operation of the compass

3-5. Other interior features

Safety Connect∗

Safety Connect is a subscription-based telematics service that uses
Global Positioning System (GPS) data and embedded cellular technology to provide safety and security features to subscribers. Safety
Connect is supported by Toyota’s designated response center,
which operates 24 hours per day, 7 days per week.
Safety Connect service is available by subscription on select,
telematics hardware-equipped vehicles.
By using the Safety Connect service, you are agreeing to be bound
by the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and its Terms and
Conditions, as in effect and amended from time to time, a current
copy of which is available at Toyota.com. All use of the Safety Connect service is subject to such then-applicable Terms and Conditions.

■ System components
Microphone
LED light indicators
“SOS” button

∗: If equipped
324

3-5. Other interior features

■ Services
Subscribers have the following Safety Connect services available:
● Automatic Collision Notification*
Helps drivers receive necessary response from emergency
service providers. (→P. 327)

*: U.S. Patent No. 7,508,298 B2
● Stolen Vehicle Location
Helps drivers in the event of vehicle theft. (→P. 328)
● Emergency Assistance Button (SOS)
Connects drivers to response-center support. (→P. 328)

■ Subscription
After you have signed the Telematics Subscription Service
Agreement and are enrolled, you can begin receiving services.
A variety of subscription terms is available for purchase. Contact
your Toyota dealer, call 1-800-331-4331, or push the “SOS” button in your vehicle for further subscription details.

325

Interior features

● Enhanced Roadside Assistance
Provides drivers various on-road assistance. (→P. 328)

3-5. Other interior features

■ Safety Connect Services Information
● Phone calls using the vehicles Bluetooth® technology will not be possible
during Safety Connect.
● Safety Connect is available beginning Fall 2009 on select Toyota models.
Contact with the Safety Connect response center is dependent upon the
telematics device being in operative condition, cellular connection availability, and GPS satellite signal reception, which can limit the ability to
reach the response center or receive emergency service support. Enrollment and Telematics Subscription Service Agreement required. A variety
of subscription terms is available; charges vary by subscription term
selected.
● Automatic Collision Notification, Emergency Assistance, Stolen Vehicle
Location, and Enhanced Roadside Assistance will function in the United
States, including Hawaii and Alaska, and in Canada. No Safety Connect
services will function outside of the United States in countries other than
Canada.
● Safety Connect services are not subject to section 255 of the Telecommunications Act and the device is not TTY compatible.
■ Languages
The Safety Connect response center will offer support in multiple languages.
The Safety Connect system will offer voice prompts in English and Spanish.
Please indicate your language of choice when enrolling.
■ When contacting the response center
You may be unable to contact the response center if the network is busy.

326

3-5. Other interior features

Safety Connect LED light Indicators
When the “POWER” switch is turned to ON mode, the red indicator
light comes on for 2 seconds then turns off. Afterward, the green indicator light comes on, indicating that the service is active.
The following indicator light patterns indicate specific system usage
conditions:
● Green indicator light on = Active service
● Green indicator light flashing = Safety Connect call in process
● Red indicator light (except at vehicle start-up) = System malfunction (contact your Toyota dealer)
3

● No indicator light (off) = Safety Connect service not active

■ Automatic Collision Notification
In case of either airbag deployment or severe rear-end collision,
the system is designed to automatically call the response center.
The responding agent receives the vehicle’s location and attempts
to speak with the vehicle occupants to assess the level of emergency. If the occupants are unable to communicate, the agent
automatically treats the call as an emergency, contacts the nearest
emergency services provider to describe the situation, and
requests that assistance be sent to the location.

327

Interior features

Safety Connect services

3-5. Other interior features

■ Stolen Vehicle Location
If your vehicle is stolen, Safety Connect can work with local authorities to assist them in locating and recovering the vehicle. After filing a police report, call the Safety Connect response center at 1800-331-4331 and follow the prompts for Safety Connect to initiate
this service.
In addition to assisting law enforcement with recovery of a stolen
vehicle, Safety-Connect-equipped vehicle location data may, under
certain circumstances, be shared with third parties to locate your
vehicle. Further information is available at Toyota.com.
■ Emergency Assistance Button (“SOS”)
In the event of an emergency on the road, push the “SOS” button
to reach the Safety Connect response center. The answering
agent will determine your vehicle’s location, assess the emergency, and dispatch the necessary assistance required.
If you accidentally press the “SOS” button, tell the response-center agent
that you are not experiencing an emergency.

■ Enhanced Roadside Assistance
Enhanced Roadside Assistance adds GPS data to the already
included warranty-based Toyota roadside service.
Subscribers can press the “SOS” button to reach a Safety Connect
response-center agent, who can help with a wide range of needs,
such as: towing, flat tire, fuel delivery, etc. For a description of the
Enhanced Roadside Assistance services and their limitations,
please see the Safety Connect Terms and Conditions, which are
available at Toyota.com.

328

3-5. Other interior features

Safety information for Safety Connect
Important! Read this information before using Safety Connect.
■ Exposure to radio frequency signals
The Safety Connect system installed in your vehicle is a low-power
radio transmitter and receiver. It receives and also sends out radio
frequency (RF) signals.
In August 1996, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
adopted RF exposure guidelines with safety levels for mobile wireless phones. Those guidelines are consistent with the safety standards previously set by the following U.S. and international
standards bodies.

● ANSI (American National Standards Institute) C95.1 [1992]

● ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation
Protection) [1996]
Those standards were based on comprehensive and periodic evaluations of the relevant scientific literature. Over 120 scientists,
engineers, and physicians from universities, and government
health agencies and industries reviewed the available body of
research to develop the ANSI Standard (C95.1).
The design of Safety Connect complies with the FCC guidelines in
addition to those standards.

329

Interior features

● NCRP (National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement) Report 86 [1986]

3-5. Other interior features

■ Certification for Safety Connect
FCC ID: O9EGTM1
FCC ID: O6Y-CDMRF101
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

330

4-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior
Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime
condition:

● Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle
body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any
dirt and dust.
● Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a
chamois.
● For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thoroughly with water.
● Wipe away any water.
● Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.
If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle
body is cool.

■ Automatic car washes
● Fold the mirrors before washing the vehicle. Start washing from the front
of the vehicle. Make sure to extend the mirrors before driving.
● Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface
and harm your vehicle’s paint.
● Vehicles with rear spoiler: In certain automatic car washes, the rear
spoiler may interfere with machine operation. This may prevent the vehicle from being cleaned properly or result in damage to the rear spoiler.
■ High pressure car washes
● Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity
of the windows.
● Before using the car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle
is closed properly.

332

4-1. Maintenance and care

■ When using a car wash
If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In that case, follow the
following correction procedures to wash the vehicle:
● Place the electronic key in a location 6 ft. (2 m) or more away from the
vehicle. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)
● Set the electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart key
system. (→P. 59)
■ Aluminum wheels (if equipped)
● Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use
hard brushes or abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical
cleaners. Use the same mild detergent and wax as used on the paint.
● Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, for example after
driving for long distance in the hot weather.
● Wash detergent from the wheels immediately after use.
■ Bumpers
4

Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.

■ When washing the vehicle
Do not apply water to the inside of the engine compartment. Doing so may
cause the electrical components etc. to catch fire.
■ Precautions regarding the exhaust pipe
Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipe to become quite hot.
When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipe until it has cooled
sufficiently, as touching a hot exhaust pipe can cause burns.
■ Precaution regarding the Blind Spot Monitor
If the paint of the rear bumper is chipped or scratched, the system may malfunction. If this occurs, consult your Toyota dealer.

333

Maintenance and care

CAUTION

4-1. Maintenance and care

NOTICE
■ To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body and components (aluminum wheels etc.)
● Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:
•
•
•
•

After driving near the sea coast
After driving on salted roads
If coal tar or tree sap is present on the paint surface
If dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings are present on the
paint surface
• After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust,
iron powder or chemical substances
• If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled with dust or mud
• If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface
● If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.
● To prevent the wheels from corroding, remove any dirt and store in a place
with low humidity when storing the wheels.
■ Cleaning the exterior lights
● Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush.
This may damage the surfaces of the lights.
● Do not apply wax to the surfaces of the lights.
Wax may cause damage to the lenses.

334

4-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior
The following procedures will help protect your vehicle's interior and
keep it in top condition:

■ Protecting the vehicle interior
Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.
■ Cleaning the leather areas
● Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.
● Wipe off any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened
with diluted detergent.
Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool detergent.

● Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly
wipe off all remaining traces of detergent.

■ Cleaning the synthetic leather areas
● Remove loose dirt using a vacuum cleaner.
● Apply a mild soap solution to the synthetic leather using a
sponge or soft cloth.
● Allow the solution to soak in for a few minutes. Remove the
dirt and wipe off the solution with a clean, damp cloth.

335

Maintenance and care

● Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining moisture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded and ventilated area.

4-1. Maintenance and care

■ Caring for leather areas
Toyota recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year
to maintain the quality of the vehicle's interior.
■ Shampooing the carpets
There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a
sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not use
water. Wipe dirty surfaces and let them dry. Excellent results are obtained by
keeping the carpet as dry as possible.
■ Seat belts
Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also
check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.

CAUTION
■ Water in the vehicle
● Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle, such as on the floor, in the
hybrid battery (traction battery) air vent, and in the trunk.
Doing so may cause the hybrid battery, electrical components, etc. to malfunction or catch fire.
● Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.
(→P. 116)
An electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function
properly, resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Cleaning the interior (especially instrument panel)
Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect off
the windshield, obstructing the driver's view and leading to an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.

336

4-1. Maintenance and care

NOTICE
■ Cleaning detergents
● Do not use the following types of detergent, as they may discolor the vehicle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces:
• Non-seat portions: Organic substances such as benzene or gasoline,
alkaline or acidic solutions, dye, and bleach
• Seats: Alkaline or acidic solutions, such as thinner, benzene, and alcohol
● Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel's or other
interior part’s painted surface may be damaged.
■ Preventing damage to leather surfaces
Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of
leather surfaces:
● Remove any dust or dirt from leather surfaces immediately.
● Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time.
Park the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.

■ Water on the floor
Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.
Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes
into contact with electrical components such as the audio system above or
under the floor of the vehicle. Water may also cause the body to rust.
■ Cleaning the inside of the rear window
● Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause
damage to the rear window defogger heater wires or antenna. Use a cloth
dampened with lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the
window in strokes running parallel to the heater wires or antenna.
● Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or antenna.

337

Maintenance and care

● Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or containing wax on the upholstery, as they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats
up significantly.

4-2. Maintenance

Maintenance requirements
To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular
maintenance are essential. It is the owner’s responsibility to perform
regular checks. Toyota recommends performing the following maintenance:

■ General maintenance
General maintenance should be performed on a daily basis.
This can be done by yourself or by a Toyota dealer.
■ Scheduled maintenance
Scheduled maintenance should be performed at specified intervals according to the maintenance schedule.
For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the
“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

■ Do-it-yourself maintenance
You can perform some maintenance procedures by yourself.
Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect warranty coverage.
The use of Toyota Repair Manuals is recommended.
For details about warranty coverage, see the separate “Owner’s Warranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

■ Repair and replacement
It is recommended that genuine Toyota parts be used for repair to ensure
performance of each system. If non-Toyota parts are used in replacement or
if a repair shop other than a Toyota dealer performs repairs, confirm the warranty coverage.
■ Reset the maintenance data (U.S.A. only)
After the required maintenance is performed according to the maintenance
schedule, please reset the maintenance data.
To reset the data, follow the procedures described below:

338

4-2. Maintenance

STEP 1 Turn the “POWER” switch off with the trip meter A reading shown.

(→P. 176)
STEP 2 While pressing the display change button (→P. 174), turn the

“POWER” switch to ON mode.
STEP 3 Continue to press and hold the knob until the trip meter displays

“000000”.
■ Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Toyota dealer
● Toyota technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date
with the latest service information. They are well informed about the
operations of all systems on your vehicle.
● Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has
been performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise
while your vehicle is under warranty, your Toyota dealer will promptly
take care of it.

CAUTION
4

■ If your vehicle is not properly maintained

■ Handling of the 12-volt battery
● Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile
components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a
well ventilated area.
● Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by
component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid
exposure and wash any affected area immediately.
● 12-volt battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and
lead compounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your
hands after handling. (→P. 361)

339

Maintenance and care

Improper maintenance could result in serious damage to the vehicle and
possible serious injury or death.

4-2. Maintenance

General maintenance
Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed at the intervals specified in the “Owner's Warranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement/Scheduled
Maintenance Guide”. It is recommended that any problem you notice
should be brought to the attention of your Toyota dealer or qualified
service shop for advice.

Engine compartment
Items

Check points

Brake fluid

Is the brake fluid at the correct
level?
(→P. 358)

Coolant

Is the coolant at the correct level?
(→P. 356)

Engine oil

Is the engine oil at the correct
level?
(→P. 352)

Exhaust system

There should not be any fumes or
strange sounds.

Radiator/condenser

The radiator and condenser
should be free from foreign
objects.
(→P. 358)

Washer fluid

Is there sufficient washer fluid?
(→P. 359)

Trunk
Items
12-volt battery

340

Check points
Check the connections. (→P. 361)

4-2. Maintenance

Vehicle interior
Items

Check points
• The accelerator pedal should
move smoothly (without uneven
pedal effort or catching).

Brake pedal

• Does the brake pedal move
smoothly?
• Does the brake pedal have appropriate clearance from the floor?
(→P. 479)
• Does the brake pedal have the
correct amount of free play?
(→P. 479)

Brakes

• The vehicle should not pull to one
side when the brakes are applied.
• The brakes should work effectively.
• The brake pedal should not feel
spongy.
• The brake pedal should not get
too close to the floor when the
brakes are applied.

Head restraints (front seat)

• Do the head restraints move
smoothly and lock securely?

Hybrid transmission “Park” mechanism

• When parked on a slope and the
parking brake is on, is the vehicle
securely stopped?

Indicators/buzzers

• Do the indicators and buzzers
function properly?

Lights

• Do all the lights come on?

Parking brake

• Does the parking brake pedal
move smoothly?
• When parked on a slope and the
parking brake is on, is the vehicle
securely stopped?
341

Maintenance and care

Accelerator pedal

4-2. Maintenance

Items

342

Check points

Seat belts

• Do the seat belts operate
smoothly?
• The seat belts should not be damaged.

Seats

• Do the seat controls operate
properly?

Steering wheel

• Does the steering wheel rotate
smoothly?
• Does the steering wheel have the
correct amount of free play?
• There should not be any strange
sounds coming from the steering
wheel.

4-2. Maintenance

Vehicle exterior
Items

Check points
• Do the doors and trunk operate
smoothly?

Engine hood

• Does the engine hood lock system work properly?

Fluid leaks

• There should not be any signs of
fluid leakage after the vehicle has
been parked.

Tires

• Is the tire inflation pressure correct?
• The tires should not be damaged or excessively worn.
• Have the tires been rotated
according to the maintenance
schedule?
• The wheel nuts should not be
loose.

CAUTION
■ If the hybrid system is operating
Turn the hybrid system off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation
before performing maintenance checks.

343

Maintenance and care

Doors/trunk

4-2. Maintenance

Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs
Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which
include OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system monitors the operation of the emission control system.

■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on
The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere
in the emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/
M test and may need to be repaired. Contact your Toyota dealer
to service the vehicle.
■ Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test in the following situations:
● When the 12-volt battery is disconnected or discharged
Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are
erased.
Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes
may not be completely set.
● When the fuel tank cap is loose
The malfunction indicator lamp comes on indicating a temporary malfunction and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.
■ When the malfunction indicator lamp still remains on after
several driving trips
The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the
vehicle is driven 40 or more times.
■ If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test
Contact your Toyota dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.

344

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service precautions
If you perform maintenance by yourself, be sure to follow the correct
procedures as given in these sections.
Items

Parts and tools

12-volt battery condition
(→P. 361)

• Grease
• Conventional wrench
(for terminal clamp bolts)

Brake fluid level

• FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE
J1703 brake fluid
• Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding
brake fluid)

(→P. 358)

345

Maintenance and care

Engine/power control unit coolant
level
(→P. 356)

• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
or a similar high quality ethylene
glycol based non-silicate, nonamine, non-nitrite and non-borate
coolant with long-life hybrid
organic acid technology
For the U.S.A.:
“Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is pre-mixed with 50%
coolant and 50% deionized
water.
For Canada:
“Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is pre-mixed with 55%
coolant and 45% deionized
water.
• Funnel (used only for adding coolant)

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Items

Parts and tools

Engine oil level

(→P. 352)

• “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or
equivalent
• Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding
engine oil)

Fuses

(→P. 384)

• Fuse with same amperage rating
as original

(→P. 395)

• Bulb with same number and wattage rating as original
• Phillips-head screwdriver
• Flathead screwdriver
• Wrench

Light bulbs

Radiators and condenser
(→P. 358)

346

⎯

Tire inflation pressure (→P. 373)

• Tire pressure gauge
• Compressed air source

Washer fluid

• Water or washer fluid containing
antifreeze (for winter use)
• Funnel (used only for adding
water or washer fluid)

(→P. 359)

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION
The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may
move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death
or serious injury, observe the following precautions:
■ When working on the engine compartment
● Make sure that the indicator on the “POWER” switch and the “READY”
indicator are both off.
● Keep hands, clothing and tools away from the moving fans and engine
drive belt.
● Be careful not to touch the engine, power control unit, radiator, exhaust
manifold, etc. right after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids
may also be hot.
● Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper and rags, in the
engine compartment.
● Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel. Fuel fumes
are flammable.

■ When working near the electric cooling fans or radiator grille

■ Safety glasses
Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from
getting in your eyes.

NOTICE
■ If you remove the air cleaner filter
Driving with the air cleaner filter removed may cause excessive engine wear
due to dirt in the air. Also, a backfire could cause a fire in the engine compartment.

347

Maintenance and care

Be sure the “POWER” switch is off.
With the “POWER” switch in ON mode, the electric cooling fans may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high. (→P. 358)

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Hood
Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.
STEP 1

Pull the hood release lever.
The hood will pop up slightly.

STEP 2

Pull up the auxiliary catch
lever and lift the hood.

CAUTION
■ Pre-driving check
Check that the hood is fully closed and locked.
If the hood is not locked properly, it may open while the vehicle is in motion
and cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.

348

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Positioning a floor jack
When raising your vehicle with a floor jack, position the jack correctly. Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury.

Front

CTY43AV171

Rear

Maintenance and care
349

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION
■ When raising your vehicle
Make sure to observe the following precautions to reduce the possibility of
death or serious injury:
● Lift up the vehicle using a floor jack
such as the one shown in the illustration.

● When using a floor jack, follow the instructions of the manual provided with
the jack.
● Do not use the jack that was supplied with your vehicle.
● Do not put any part of your body underneath the vehicle when it is supported only by the floor jack.
● Always use floor jack and/or automotive jack stands on a solid, flat, level
surface.
● Do not start the hybrid system while the vehicle is supported by the floor
jack.
● Stop the vehicle on level, firm ground, set the parking brake and shift the
shift lever to P.
● Make sure to set the floor jack properly at the jack point.
Raising the vehicle with an improperly positioned floor jack will damage
the vehicle and may cause the vehicle to fall off the floor jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in the vehicle.
● When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on top of or underneath
the floor jack.

350

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Engine compartment

Fuse box

(→P. 384)

Engine oil level dipstick
(→P. 352)

Condenser

(→P. 358)

Electric cooling fans
Engine coolant
reservoir

Brake fluid reservoir
(→P. 358)

Washer fluid tank (→P. 359)

Engine coolant
radiator

Power control unit
coolant reservoir (→P. 356)

(→P. 358)

Maintenance and care

Engine oil filler cap
(→P. 353)

Power control unit
coolant radiator (→P. 358)

(→P. 356)

351

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Engine oil
With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil
level on the dipstick.
■ Checking the engine oil
STEP 1

Park the vehicle on level ground. After warming up the engine
and turning off the hybrid system, wait more than 5 minutes
for the oil to drain back into the bottom of the engine.

STEP 2

Holding a rag under the end, pull
the dipstick out.

STEP 3

Wipe the dipstick clean.

STEP 4

Reinsert the dipstick fully.

STEP 5

Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check
the oil level.

STEP 6

Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.
Low
Full

352

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Adding engine oil
If the oil level is below or near
the low level mark, add engine
oil of the same type as that
already in the engine.

Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before
adding oil.
Engine oil selection

→P. 475

Oil quantity
(Low → Full)

1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 lmp. qt.)

Items

Clean funnel

Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise.

STEP 2

Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.

STEP 3

Install the oil filler cap by turning it clockwise.

Maintenance and care

STEP 1

353

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Engine oil consumption
● The amount of engine oil consumed depends on the oil viscosity, the
quality of the oil and the way the vehicle is driven.
● More oil is consumed under driving conditions such as high speeds and
frequent acceleration and deceleration.
● A new engine consumes more oil.
● When judging the amount of oil consumption, keep in mind that the oil
may have become diluted, making it difficult to judge the true level accurately.
● Oil consumption: Max. 1.1 qt./600 miles (0.9 Imp. qt./600 miles, 1.0 L/
1000 km)
● If your vehicle consumes more than 1.1 qt. (1.0 L, 0.9 Imp. qt.) every 600
miles (1000 km), contact your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION
■ Used engine oil
● Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may
cause skin disorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should
be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine
oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water.
● Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do
not dispose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the
ground. Call your Toyota dealer, service station or auto parts store for
information concerning recycling or disposal.
● Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.

354

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

NOTICE
■ To prevent serious engine damage
Check the oil level on a regular basis.
■ When replacing the engine oil
● Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.
● Avoid overfilling, as the engine could be damaged.
● Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.
● Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.

Maintenance and care
355

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Coolant
Engine coolant reservoir
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “F” and “L” lines on
the reservoir when the engine is cold.
Reservoir cap
“F” line
“L” line
If the level is on or below the “L”
line, add coolant up to the “F” line.
(→P. 465)

Power control unit coolant reservoir
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “FULL” and “LOW”
lines on the reservoir when the hybrid system is cold.
Reservoir cap
“FULL” line
“LOW” line
If the level is on or below the
“LOW” line, add coolant up to the
“FULL” line. (→P. 466)

356

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Coolant selection
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or a similar high quality ethylene
glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant
with long-life hybrid organic acid technology.
U.S.A.:

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant
and 50% deionized water. (Minimum temperature: -31°F [-35°C])

Canada: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant
and 45% deionized water. (Minimum temperature: -44°F [-42°C])
For more details about coolant, contact your Toyota dealer.
■ If the coolant level drops within a short time of replenishing
Visually check the radiators, hoses, engine/power control unit coolant reservoir caps, drain cock and water pump.
If you cannot find a leak, have your Toyota dealer test the cap and check for
leaks in the cooling systems.
4

CAUTION

Do not remove the engine/power control unit coolant reservoir caps.
The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the
cap is removed, causing serious injuries, such as burns.

NOTICE
■ When adding coolant
Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of
water and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion
protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.
■ If you spill coolant
Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it from damaging parts or paint.

357

Maintenance and care

■ When the hybrid system is hot

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Radiators and condenser
Check the radiators and condenser and clear away any foreign
objects.
If either of the above parts is extremely dirty or you are not sure of
their condition, have your vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
CAUTION
■ When the hybrid system is hot
Do not touch the radiators or condenser as they may be hot and cause serious injuries, such as burns.

Brake fluid
■ Checking fluid level
The brake fluid level should be
between the “MAX” and “MIN”
lines on the tank.
“MAX”
“MIN”

■ Adding fluid
Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary item.
Fluid type
Item

358

FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid
Clean funnel

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air
Excess moisture in the brake fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking
efficiency. Use only newly opened brake fluid.

CAUTION
■ When filling the reservoir
Take care as brake fluid can harm your hands and eyes and damage painted
surfaces.
If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean
water immediately.
If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.

NOTICE
■ If the fluid level is low or high

Washer fluid
Add washer fluid in the following
situations.
● Any washer does not work.
● The
warning
message
appears on the multi-information display.

359

Maintenance and care

It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads
wear out or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, there may be a serious problem.

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION
■ When adding washer fluid
Do not add washer fluid when the hybrid system is hot or operating as
washer fluid contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the hybrid system etc.

NOTICE
■ Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid
Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.
Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces.
■ Diluting washer fluid
Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary.
Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the label of the washer fluid bottle.

360

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

12-volt battery
■ Location
The 12-volt battery is located
on the right-hand side of the
luggage compartment.

■ Removing the 12-volt battery cover
Remove the 12-volt battery
cover.

Install the cover
Lift the tab to secure to the
trunk liner

361

Maintenance and care

■ Installing the 12-volt battery cover

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Exterior
Make sure that the 12-volt battery terminals are not corroded
and that there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose
clamps.
Terminals
Hold-down clamp

■ Before recharging
When recharging, the 12-volt battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Therefore, observe the following precautions before
recharging:
● If recharging with the 12-volt battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to
disconnect the ground cable.
● Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and
disconnecting the charger cables to the 12-volt battery.

362

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ After recharging/reconnecting the 12-volt battery
● Unlocking the doors using the smart key system may not be possible
immediately after reconnecting the 12-volt battery. If this happens, use
the wireless remote control or the mechanical key to lock/unlock the
doors.
● Start the hybrid system with the “POWER” switch in ACCESSORY mode.
The hybrid system may not start with the “POWER” switch turned off.
However, the hybrid system will operate normally from the second
attempt.
● The “POWER” switch mode is recorded by the vehicle. If the 12-volt battery is reconnected, the vehicle will return the “POWER” switch mode to
the status it was in before the 12-volt battery was disconnected. Make
sure to turn off the power before disconnect the 12-volt battery. Take
extra care when connecting the 12-volt battery if the “POWER” switch
mode prior to discharge is unknown.
If the system will not start even after multiple attempts, contact your Toyota
dealer.
4

CAUTION

The 12-volt battery contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may
produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk
of death or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or
near the 12-volt battery:
● Do not cause sparks by touching the 12-volt battery terminals with tools.
● Do not smoke or light a match near the 12-volt battery.
● Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.
● Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.
● Wear protective safety glasses when working near the 12-volt battery.
● Keep children away from the 12-volt battery.
■ Where to safely charge the 12-volt battery
Always charge the 12-volt battery in an open area. Do not charge the 12-volt
battery in a garage or closed room where there is insufficient ventilation.

363

Maintenance and care

■ Chemicals in the 12-volt battery

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION
■ How to recharge the 12-volt battery
Only perform a slow charge (5 A or less). The 12-volt battery may explode if
charged at a quicker rate.
■ Emergency measures regarding electrolyte
● If electrolyte gets in your eyes
Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or
cloth while traveling to the nearest medical facility.
● If electrolyte gets on your skin
Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical
attention immediately.
● If electrolyte gets on your clothes
It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing and follow the procedure above if necessary.
● If you accidentally swallow electrolyte
Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical attention
immediately.
■ When replacing the 12-volt battery
Use a 12-volt battery designed for this vehicle. Failure to do so may cause
gas (hydrogen) to enter the passenger compartment, causing a fire or explosion.
For replacement of the 12-volt battery, contact your Toyota dealer.

NOTICE
■ When recharging the 12-volt battery
Never recharge the 12-volt battery while the hybrid system is operating.
Also, be sure all accessories are turned off.

364

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Tires
Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance schedules and treadwear.

■ Checking tires
New tread
Treadwear indicator
Worn tread
The location of treadwear
indicators is shown by the
“TWI” or “ ” marks, etc.,
molded on the sidewall of
each tire.
Check spare tire condition
and pressure if not rotated.

■ Tire rotation
Rotate the tires in the order
shown.

■ Tire pressure warning system (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure warning system
that uses tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect
low tire inflation pressure before serious problems arise.
(→P. 416)

365

Maintenance and care

Front

To equalize tire wear and
extend tire life, Toyota recommends that tire rotation is
carried out at the same interval as tire inspection.

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters must also be installed.
When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are
installed, new ID codes must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer and the tire pressure warning system must be initialized. Have tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes
registered by your Toyota dealer. (→P. 367)
■ The tire pressure warning system must be initialized in the following circumstances:
● When the tire inflation pressure is changed such as when
changing travelling speed or load weight
● When changing the tire size
When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire
inflation pressure is set as the benchmark pressure.
■ How to initialize the tire pressure warning system
STEP 1

Park the vehicle in a safe place and turn the “POWER” switch
off.
Initialization cannot be performed while the vehicle is moving.

STEP 2

Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. (→P. 480)
Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire
inflation pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will
operate based on this pressure level.

STEP 3

366

Turn the “POWER” switch to ON mode.

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

STEP 4

Press and hold the tire pressure
warning reset switch until the tire
pressure warning light blinks
slowly 3 times.

STEP 5

Wait for a few minutes with the “POWER” switch in IGNITION
ON mode and then turn the “POWER” switch off.

The tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is equipped with a
unique ID code. When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID code. Have the ID code
registered by your Toyota dealer.

367

Maintenance and care

Registering ID codes

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ When to replace your vehicle’s tires

Tires should be replaced if:
● You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to

expose the fabric, and bulges indicating internal damage
● A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the

size or location of a cut or other damage
If you are not sure, consult with your Toyota dealer.
■ Replacing tires and wheels

If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not
registered, the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After
driving for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light blinks for 1
minute and stays on to indicate a system malfunction.
■ Tire life

Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even
if it has seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.
■ Routine tire inflation pressure checks

The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation
pressure checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of
your routine of daily vehicle checks.
■ Maximum load of tire

Check that the maximum load of the replacement tire is greater than 1/2
of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the
rear axle, whichever is greater.
For the GAWR, see the Certification
Label. For the maximum load of the
tire, see the load limit at maximum cold
tire inflation pressure mentioned on the
sidewall of the tire. (→P. 486)

368

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Tire types
● Summer tires

Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway
driving under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same
traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for
driving on snow-covered or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered
roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires is recommended. When
installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.
● All season tires

All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to
be adequate for driving in most winter conditions as well as for use
year-round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction
performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also,
all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance
compared with summer tires in highway driving.
● Snow tires

■ Initializing the tire pressure warning system

Initialize the system with the tire inflation pressure adjusted to the specified level.
■ If the tread on snow tires wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm)

The effectiveness of the tires as snow tires is lost.
■ If you press the tire pressure warning reset switch accidentally

If initialization is performed, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level and initialize the tire pressure warning system again.

369

Maintenance and care

For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using
snow tires. If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Since your
vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow
tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without
first checking local regulations for possible restrictions. Snow tires
should be installed on all wheels. (→P. 225)

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ When the initialization of the tire pressure warning system has

failed
Initialization can be completed in a few minutes. However, in the following cases, the settings have not been recorded and the system will not
operate properly. If repeated attempts to record tire inflation pressure
settings are unsuccessful, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
● When operating the tire pressure warning reset switch, the tire pres-

sure warning light does not blink 3 times.
● After driving for a certain period of time since the initialization has

been completed, the warning light comes on after blinking for 1
minute.
■ Tire pressure warning system certification

FCC ID: PAXPMVC010
FCC ID: HYQ23AAD
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

370

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION
■ When inspecting or replacing tires

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.
Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drive train as well as
dangerous handling characteristics, which may lead to an accident
resulting in death or serious injury.
● Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns.

Also, do not mix tires of remarkably different treadwear.
● Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Toyota.
● Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply

tires).
● Do not mix summer, all season and snow tires.
● Do not use tires that have been used on another vehicle.

Do not use tires if you do not know how they were used previously.
■ When initializing the tire pressure warning system

371

Maintenance and care

Do not operate the tire pressure warning reset switch without first adjusting the tire inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the tire
pressure warning light may not come on even if the tire inflation pressure
is low, or it may come on when the tire inflation pressure is actually normal.

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

NOTICE
■ Repairing or replacing tires, wheels, tire pressure warning valves,

transmitters and tire valve caps
● When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning

valves and transmitters, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may be damaged if not handled
correctly.
● When replacing tire valve caps, do not use tire valve caps other than

those specified. The cap may become stuck.
■ To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmit-

ters
When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is
used, contact your Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop as soon
as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter when replacing the tire. (→P. 366)
■ Driving on rough roads

Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or potholes.
These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing
the cushioning ability of the tires. In addition, driving on rough roads may
cause damage to the tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels
and body.
■ If tire inflation pressure of each tire becomes low while driving

Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.

372

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Tire inflation pressure
■ Tire inflation pressure
The recommended cold tire inflation pressure and tire size are
displayed on the tire and loading information label. (→P. 480)

Maintenance and care
373

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Inspection and adjustment procedure
Tire valve
Tire pressure gauge

STEP 1

Remove the tire valve cap.

STEP 2

Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve.

STEP 3

Read the pressure using the gauge gradations.

STEP 4

If the tire inflation pressure is not at the recommended
level, adjust the pressure.
If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to
deflate.

STEP 5

After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement
and adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check
for leakage.

STEP 6

Put the tire valve cap back on.

■ Tire inflation pressure check interval

You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least
once a month.
Do not forget to check the spare.

374

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure

Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:
● Reduced fuel efficiency
● Reduced driving comfort and tire life
● Reduced safety
● Damage to the drive train

If a tire needs frequent inflating, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.
■ Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure

When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:
● Check only when the tires are cold.

If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or has not been
driven for more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold
tire inflation pressure reading.
● Always use a tire pressure gauge.

The appearance of the tire can be misleading. In addition, tire inflation pressure that is even just a few pounds off can affect ride quality
and handling.
inflation pressure to be higher after driving.
● Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.

Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle
is balanced.

375

Maintenance and care

● Do not reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. It is normal for tire

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION
■ Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance

Keep your tires properly inflated. Otherwise, the following conditions
may occur and result in an accident causing death or serious injury:
● Excessive wear
● Uneven wear
● Poor handling
● Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires
● Poor sealing of the tire bead
● Wheel deformation and/or tire separation
● A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards

NOTICE
■ When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure

Be sure to put the tire valve caps back on.
Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve and
cause air leakage, which could result in an accident. If the caps are lost,
replace them as soon as possible.

376

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Wheels
If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be
replaced. Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or
cause a loss of handling control.

■ Wheel selection
When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that
they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter,
rim width, and inset*.
Replacement wheels are available at your Toyota dealer.
*: Conventionally referred to as “offset”.
Toyota does not recommend using the following:
● Wheels of different sizes or types
● Used wheels
● Bent wheels that have been straightened
4

■ Aluminum wheel precautions (if equipped)

● When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the
wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km).
● Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using
tire chains.
● Use only Toyota genuine balance weights or equivalent and
use a plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.

377

Maintenance and care

● Use only Toyota wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use
with your aluminum wheels.

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ When replacing wheels (vehicles with a tire pressure warning sys-

tem)
The wheels of your vehicle are equipped with tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to
provide advance warning in the event of a loss in tire inflation pressure.
Whenever wheels are replaced, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must be installed. (→P. 366)

CAUTION
■ When replacing wheels
● Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in

the Owner’s Manual, as this may result in a loss of handling control.
● Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a

tubeless tire. Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or serious injury.
■ When installing the wheel nuts
● Be sure to install the wheel nuts with

Tapered portion

the tapered ends facing inward.
Installing the nuts with the tapered
ends facing outward can cause the
wheel to break and eventually cause
the wheel to come off while driving,
which could lead to an accident
resulting in death or serious injury.

● Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.

Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened,
leading to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can
cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing an
accident and resulting in death or serious injury. Remove any oil or
grease from the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.

378

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

NOTICE
■ Replacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters (vehicles

with a tire pressure warning system)
● Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warn-

ing valves and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your
Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to
purchase your tire pressure warning valves and transmitters at your
Toyota dealer.
● Ensure that only genuine Toyota wheels are used on your vehicle.

Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly
with non-genuine wheels.

Maintenance and care
379

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Air conditioning filter
The air conditioning filter must be changed regularly to maintain air
conditioning efficiency.

■ Removal method
STEP 1

Turn the “POWER” switch off.

STEP 2

Open the glove box and
remove the glove box cover
inside the glove box.

STEP 3

Remove the filter cover.

■ Replacement method
Remove the air conditioning
filter and replace it with a new
one.
The “↑UP” marks shown on
the filter should be pointing up.

380

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Checking interval
Inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance
schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early replacement
may be required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to
the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.)
■ If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically
The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.

NOTICE
■ When using the air conditioning system
Make sure that a filter is always installed.
Using the air conditioning system without a filter may cause damage to the
system.
4

Maintenance and care
381

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Electronic key battery
Replace the battery with a new one if it is depleted.

■ You will need the following items:
● Flathead screwdriver
● Small flathead screwdriver
● Lithium battery CR2032
■ Replacing the battery
STEP 1

Take out the mechanical key.

STEP 2

Remove the cover.
To prevent damage to the key,
cover the tip of the screwdriver
with a rag.

STEP 3

Remove the depleted battery
using a small flathead screwdriver.
Insert a new battery with the
“+” terminal facing up.

382

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Use a CR2032 lithium battery
● Batteries can be purchased at your Toyota dealer, local electrical appliance shops or camera stores.
● Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the
manufacturer.
● Dispose of used batteries according to local laws.
■ If the key battery is depleted
The following symptoms may occur:
● The smart key system and wireless remote control will not function properly.
● The operational range will be reduced.

CAUTION
■ Removed battery and other parts

NOTICE
■ For normal operation after replacing the battery
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents:
● Always work with dry hands.
Moisture may cause the battery to rust.
● Do not touch or move any other components inside the remote control.
● Do not bend either of the battery terminals.

383

Maintenance and care

Keep away from children. These parts are small and if swallowed by a child,
they can cause choking. Failure to do so could result in death or serious
injury.

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Checking and replacing fuses

If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have
blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.
STEP 1

Turn the “POWER” switch off.

STEP 2

Open the fuse box cover.

Engine compartment (type A fuse box)
Push the tabs in and lift the lid
off.

Engine compartment (type B fuse box)
Push the tabs in and lift the lid
off.

Under the instrument panel
Remove the lid.

384

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

STEP 3

After a system failure, see “Fuse layout and amperage ratings” (→P. 386) for details about which fuse to check.

STEP 4

Remove the fuse.
Only type A fuse can be
removed using the pullout
tool.

STEP 5

Check if the fuse has blown.

Type A
Normal fuse
4

Blown fuse

Type B
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace the blown fuse with a
new fuse of an appropriate
amperage rating. The amperage rating can be found on the
fuse box lid.

385

Maintenance and care

Replace the blown fuse with a
new fuse of an appropriate
amperage rating. The amperage rating can be found on the
fuse box lid.

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Type C
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Contact your Toyota dealer.

Fuse layout and amperage ratings
■ Engine compartment (type A fuse box)
Fuse block

386

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Fuse block on the back of the cover

Ampere

Circuit

METER-IG2

Gauge and meters

FAN

50 A

Electric cooling fans

H-LP CLN

30 A

No circuit

ENG W/PMP

30 A

Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system

PTC HTR NO.2

50 A

PTC heater

PTC HTR NO.1

50 A

PTC heater

HTR

50 A

Air conditioning system

DC/DC

120 A

Hybrid system

ABS NO.1

30 A

Electronically controlled brake system

H-LP-MAIN

30 A

H-LP LH-LO, H-LP RH-LO, MNL HLP LVL, headlight (low beam)

ABS MTR NO.2

50 A

Electronically controlled brake system

ABS MTR NO.1

50 A

Electronically controlled brake system

Maintenance and care

Fuse

387

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Fuse

Ampere

Circuit

R/B NO.2

50 A

IGCT-MAIN, INV W/PMP

EPS

80 A

Electric power steering

S-HORN

7.5 A

S-HORN

DEICER

15 A

No circuit

HORN

10 A

Horns

EFI NO.2

15 A

Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system

EFI NO.3

7.5 A

Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system

INJ

7.5 A

Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system

ECU-IG2 NO.3

7.5 A

Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system, steering lock system,
hybrid system

IGN

15 A

Starter system

D/L-AM2

20 A

No circuit

IG2-MAIN

25 A

IGN, INJ, METER-IG2, ECU-IG2
NO.3, A/B, ECU-IG2 NO.2, ECUIG2 NO.1

DC/DC-S

7.5 A

Hybrid system

MAYDAY

TURN&HAZ

15 A

Turn signal lights, emergency
flashers, gauge and meters

STRG LOCK

10 A

Steering lock system

AMP

15 A

Audio system

15 A*

30
388

H-LP LH-LO

20 A*2

Left-hand headlight (low beam)

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Fuse

Ampere
15 A*1

Circuit
Right-hand headlight (low beam)

H-LP RH-LO

MNL H-LP
LVL*2

7.5 A

Manual headlight leveling system

EFI-MAIN NO.1

30 A

Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system, EFI NO.2, EFI NO.3

SMART

Smart key system

ETCS

10 A

Electronic throttle control system

ABS NO.2

7.5 A

Electronically controlled brake system

EFI NO.1

7.5 A

Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system

EFI-MAIN NO.2

20 A

A/F sensor

AM2

7.5 A

Hybrid system

RADIO-B

20 A

Audio system, navigation system

DOME

7.5 A

Clock, vanity lights, interior lights,
personal lights, trunk light, door
courtesy lights

20 A*2

ECU-B NO.1

10 A

SPARE

25 A

Spare fuse

SPARE

30 A

Spare fuse

Maintenance and care

*1:
*2:

Smart key system, gauge and
meters, Blind Spot Monitor, steering sensor, occupant classification
system, multiplex communication
system

Vehicles with halogen headlight
Vehicles with discharge headlight

389

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Engine compartment (type B fuse box)

Fuse

390

Ampere

Circuit

PM IGCT

7.5 A

Hybrid system, electronic controlled transmission

BATT VL SSR

10 A

Hybrid system

INV

7.5 A

Hybrid system

DC/DC IGCT

10 A

Hybrid system

INV W/PMP
RLY

7.5 A

Hybrid system

BATT FAN

7.5 A

Battery cooling fan

INV W/PMP

15 A

Hybrid system

IGCT-MAIN

25 A

DC/DC IGCT, INV, BATT VL SSR,
PM IGCT, INV W/PMP RLY, BATT
FAN

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Under the instrument panel

Fuse

ECU-IG1 NO.1

Circuit

10 A

Shift lock control system, seat
heaters, smart key system, tire
pressure warning system, multiplex
communication system, audio system, navigation system, moon roof,
auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror, air conditioning system

10 A

Electronically controlled brake system, electric cooling fans, stop
lights, steering sensor, Vehicle
Proximity Notification System, rear
window defogger, outside rear view
mirror defogger, back-up lights,
audio system, navigation system

PANEL

10 A

Switch illumination, air conditioning system, shift lever light, glove
box light, audio system, navigation
system, personal lights, interior
lights

TAIL

15 A

Parking lights, side marker lights,
tail lights, license plate lights, fog
lights

Maintenance and care

ECU-IG1 NO.2

Ampere

391

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Fuse

Ampere

Circuit

EPS-IG1

7.5 A

Electric power steering

ECU-IG1 NO.3

7.5 A

Blind Spot Monitor

S/HTR&FAN
F/L

10 A

Seat heaters

H-LP LVL

7.5 A

No circuit

WASHER

10 A

Windshield wipers and washer

A/C-IG1

7.5 A

Air conditioning system, PTC
heater

WIPER

25 A

Windshield wipers and washer

BKUP LP

7.5 A

No circuit

DOOR NO.1

30 A

Power windows

WIPER-S

No circuit

P/OUTLET RR

20 A

Power outlet

SFT LOCKACC

No circuit

DOOR R/R

20 A

Rear right-hand power windows

DOOR R/L

20 A

Rear left-hand power windows

OBD

10 A

On-board diagnosis system

ECU-B NO.2

10 A

Smart key system, tire pressure
warning system

DOOR NO.2

20 A

Power windows

AM1

7.5 A

No circuit

STOP

7.5 A

Tail lights, electronically controlled
brake system, high mounted stoplight, shift lock control system,
hybrid system, Vehicle Proximity
Notification System

P/SEAT RR

30 A

No circuit

A/C-B

7.5 A

Air conditioning system

392

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Fuse

Ampere

Circuit

S/ROOF

10 A

Moon roof

P/SEAT FR

30 A

Power seats

PSB

30 A

No circuit

D/L-AM1

20 A

Multiplex communication system,
power door lock, trunk opener
switch

TI&TE

20 A

No circuit

A/B

10 A

Occupant classification system,
SRS airbag system

ECU-IG2 NO.1

7.5 A

Hybrid system

ECU-IG2 NO.2

7.5 A

Electronically controlled brake system, smart key system

CIG&P/
OUTLET

15 A

Power outlet

ECU-ACC

7.5 A

Clock, outside rear view mirrors,
multiplex communication system,
audio system, navigation system

S/HTR&FAN F/
R

10 A

Seat heaters

S/HTR RR

20 A

No circuit

Maintenance and care
393

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ After a fuse is replaced
● If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb
may need replacement. (→P. 395)
● If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
■ If there is an overload in a circuit
The fuses are designed to blow, protecting the wiring harness from damage.
■ When replacing light bulbs
Toyota recommends that you use genuine Toyota products designed for this
vehicle. Because certain bulbs are connected to circuits designed to prevent
overload, non-genuine parts or parts not designed for this vehicle may be
unusable.

CAUTION
■ To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause damage, and possibly a fire or injury.
● Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than that indicated, or use
any other object in place of a fuse.
● Always use a genuine Toyota fuse or equivalent.
Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.
This can cause extensive damage or even fire.
● Do not modify the fuses or fuse boxes.

NOTICE
■ Before replacing fuses
Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your
Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

394

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Light bulbs
You may replace the following bulbs by yourself. The difficulty level
of replacement varies depending on the bulb. If necessary bulb
replacement seems difficult to perform, contact your Toyota dealer.
For more information about replacing other light bulbs, contact your
Toyota dealer.

■ Preparing for light bulb replacement
Check the wattage of the light bulb to be replaced. (→P. 482)
■ Front bulb locations
Headlight low beam
(halogen bulb)
Headlight high beam
and daytime running
light
4

Maintenance and care

Front side marker light
Front turn signal/parking light
Fog light (if equipped)

395

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Rear bulb locations
Rear turn signal light
Back-up light

Rear side marker light
Stop/tail light

License plate lights

Replacing light bulbs
■ Headlights high beam and daytime running lights
STEP 1

Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

STEP 2

Unplug the connector while
depressing the lock release.

396

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Headlight low beam (halogen bulb)
STEP 1

Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

STEP 2

Unplug the connector while
depressing the lock release.

STEP 1

Turn the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the fog light
that you wish to replace.
For example, if you wish to
replace the fog light on the left
side, turn the steering wheel to
the right.

397

Maintenance and care

■ Fog light (if equipped)

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

STEP 2

Remove the fender liner clip.
After turning the clip, pull the
clip until it stops.
Turn the clip again, and then
pull out the clip.

STEP 3

Partly remove the fender liner
and unplug the connector while
depressing the lock release.

STEP 4

Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

398

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Front turn signal/parking light
STEP 1

Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

STEP 2

Remove the light bulb.

STEP 1

Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

399

Maintenance and care

■ Front side marker light

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Remove the light bulb.

STEP 2

■ Rear side marker light, rear turn signal light and stop/tail light
STEP 1

Open the trunk lid and remove
the luggage trim cover clips.

STEP 2

Pull the hook while depressing
the button.

The button

STEP 3

400

Partly remove the luggage trim
cover.

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

STEP 4

Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
Rear side marker light
Rear turn signal light
Stop/tail light

STEP 5

Remove the light bulb.
Rear side marker light
Rear turn signal light
Stop/tail light

■ Back-up light
Open the trunk lid and remove
the clips. Then partly remove the
trunk panel cover.

STEP 2

Unplug the connector while
depressing the lock release.

401

Maintenance and care

STEP 1

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

STEP 3

Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

STEP 4

Remove the light bulb.

■ License plate light
STEP 1

Remove the lens.
Insert a properly sized Allen key
into the hole of the lens, and pry
off the lens as shown in the illustration.
To prevent damaging the vehicle,
wrap the tip of the Allen key with
a tape.

STEP 2

402

Remove the light bulb.

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Lights other than the above
If any of the lights listed below has burnt out, have it replaced by
your Toyota dealer.
● Headlight low beams (discharge bulb)
● High mounted stoplight
■ Discharge headlights (if equipped)
If voltage to the discharge bulbs is insufficient, the bulbs may not come on,
or may go out temporarily. The discharge bulbs will come on when normal
power is restored.
■ LED light bulbs
The high mounted stoplight consists of a number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs
burn out, take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer to have the light replaced.
■ Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens
Contact your Toyota dealer for more information in the following situations.
Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does
not indicate a malfunction.

Maintenance and care

● Large drops of water have built up on the inside of the lens.
● Water has built up inside the headlight.

403

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Removing and installing the clips
The luggage trim cover and trunk panel cover clip
Removing
Installing

The fender liner clip
Installing

■ When replacing light bulbs
→P. 394

CAUTION
■ Replacing light bulbs
● Turn off the lights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after
turning off the lights.
The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.
● Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. Hold the
bulb by the plastic or metal portion.
If the bulb is scratched or dropped, it may blow out or crack.
● Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failure to do so
may result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This
may damage the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.

404

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION
Metal
components

● Vehicles with discharge headlights:
While the low beam headlights are
turned on, and for a short time after
they have been turned off, metal components at the rear of the headlight
assembly will be extremely hot. To prevent burns, do not touch these metal
components until you are certain they
have cooled down.

■ Discharge headlights (if equipped)
● Contact your Toyota dealer before replacing the discharge headlights
(including light bulbs).

● Do not attempt to take apart or repair the low beam discharge headlight
bulbs, connectors, power supply circuits, or related components.
Doing so could result in electric shock and serious injury or death.
■ To prevent damage or fire
Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.

405

Maintenance and care

● Do not touch the discharge headlight’s high voltage socket when the headlights are turned on.
An extremely high voltage of 30000 V will be discharged and could result
in serious injury or death by electric shock.

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

406

5-1. Essential information

Emergency flashers
Use the emergency flashers if the vehicle malfunctions or is
involved in an accident.

Press the switch to flash all
the turn signal lights. To turn
them off, press the switch
once again.

NOTICE
■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Do not leave the emergency flashers on longer than necessary when the
hybrid system is not operating.

408

5-1. Essential information

If your vehicle needs to be towed
If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by
your Toyota dealer or a commercial towing service, using a lift-type
truck or flatbed truck.
Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/provincial and local laws.

Before towing
The following may indicate a problem with your hybrid transmission.
Contact your Toyota dealer before towing.
● The hybrid system is operating but the vehicle will not move.
● The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.
Towing with a sling-type truck
Do not tow with a sling-type truck
to prevent body damage.
5

When trouble arises
409

5-1. Essential information

Towing with a wheel-lift type truck
From the front
Release the parking brake.

From the rear
Use a towing dolly under the
front wheels.

Using a flatbed truck
If you use chains or cables to tie
down your vehicle, the angles
shaded in black must be 45°.
Do not overly tighten the tie
downs or the vehicle may be
damaged.

410

5-1. Essential information

NOTICE
■ To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission when towing
using a wheel-lift type truck
Never tow this vehicle from the rear with the front wheels on the ground.
■ To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing using a wheel-lift type
truck
When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at
the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the
vehicle could be damaged while being towed.
■ To prevent body damage when towing with a sling-type truck
Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear.

When trouble arises
411

5-1. Essential information

If you think something is wrong
If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably
needs adjustment or repair. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible.

■ Visible symptoms
● Fluid leaks under the vehicle
(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)
● Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear
● The rightmost segment of the engine coolant temperature display flashes
■ Audible symptoms
● Changes in exhaust sound
● Excessive tire squeal when cornering
● Strange noises related to the suspension system
● Pinging or other noises related to the hybrid system
■ Operational symptoms
● Engine missing, stumbling or running roughly
● Appreciable loss of power
● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking
● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road
● Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost
touches the floor

412

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds...
Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights
comes on or flashes. If a light comes on or flashes, but then goes
off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system.
However, if this continues to occur, have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.

Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.
The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake system. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your
Toyota dealer.
Warning light

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

Warning light/Details
Brake system warning light in red (warning buzzer)*
• Low brake fluid
• Malfunction in the brake system
This light also comes on when the parking brake is not
released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is fully
released the system is operating normally.
5

*: Brake system warning buzzer:

Parking brake engaged warning buzzer:
→P. 426

413

When trouble arises

When there is a possible problem that could affect braking performance, the
warning light will come on and a warning buzzer will sound.

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Stop the vehicle immediately.
The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to the vehicle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a
safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.
Warning light

Warning light/Details
Charging system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system.
Low engine oil pressure warning light
Indicates that the engine oil pressure is too low.
High engine coolant temperature warning light (the
rightmost segment of the engine coolant temperature
display flashes)
Indicates that the engine is almost overheating. (→P. 465)

Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
Failing to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to
the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
Warning light

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

Warning light/Details
Malfunction indicator lamp
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The hybrid system;
• The electronic engine control system; or
• The electronic throttle control system; or
• The hybrid transmission control system.
SRS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The SRS airbag system; or
• The front passenger occupant classification system; or
• The seat belt pretensioner system.

414

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning light

(U.S.A.)

Warning light/Details

ABS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The ABS; or
• The brake assist system.

(Canada)
Brake system warning light in yellow
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The regenerative brake system; or
• The electronically controlled brake system.

(Comes on)

Slip indicator light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• VSC system; or
• TRAC system; or
• Hill-start assist control.
Electric power steering system warning light (warning
buzzer)
Indicates a malfunction in the EPS system.

■ Brake system warning light operation

415

When trouble arises

Although depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may cause the red brake
system warning light to turn on and the buzzer to sound, this does not indicate a malfunction.

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Follow the correction procedures.
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem,
check that the warning light goes off.
Warning light

416

Warning light/Details

Correction procedure

Open door warning light
(warning buzzer)*1
Indicates that a door or the
trunk is not fully closed.

Check that all doors and the
trunk are closed.

Low fuel level warning
light
Indicates remaining fuel is
approximately 2.6 gal. (9.7
L, 2.1 Imp. gal.) or less.

Refuel the vehicle.

Driver’s/front passenger’s seat belt reminder
light (warning buzzer)*2
Warns the driver/front passenger to fasten his/her
seat belt.

Fasten the seat belt.

Master warning light
A buzzer sounds and the
warning light comes on
and flashes to indicate that
the master warning system
has detected a malfunction.

→P. 423

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning light

Warning light/Details

Correction procedure

Tire pressure warning
light

(U.S.A. only)

When the light comes on:
Low tire inflation pressure
such as
• Natural causes (→P. 418)
• Flat tire (→P. 442)

Adjust the tire inflation
pressure to the specified
level.
The light will turn off after
a few minutes. In case
the light does not turn off
even if the tire inflation
pressure is adjusted,
have the system checked
by your Toyota dealer.

When the light comes on
after blinking for 1 minute:
Malfunction in the tire
pressure warning system
(→P. 420)

Have the system checked
by your Toyota dealer.

: Open door warning buzzer:
→P. 426

*2: Driver's

Front passenger's seat belt buzzer:
The front passenger's seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the front passenger
that his or her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds once if the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h). If the seat belt is still unfastened
after 30 seconds, the buzzer will sound intermittently for 10 seconds. Then, if
the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 20
more seconds.

417

When trouble arises

seat belt buzzer:
The driver's seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the driver that his or her seat
belt is not fastened. Once the “POWER” switch is turned to ON mode, the
buzzer sounds for 6 seconds. If the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20
km/h), the buzzer sounds once. If the seat belt is still unfastened after 30
seconds, the buzzer will sound intermittently for 10 seconds. Then, if the
seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 20
more seconds.

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ SRS warning light
This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag
sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driver's seat belt buckle switch, front passenger occupant classification
system (ECU and sensors), “AIR BAG ON” indicator light, “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator light, front passenger's seat belt buckle switch, seat belt pretensioner assemblies, airbags, interconnecting wiring and power sources. (→P.
115)
■ Front passenger detection sensor, passenger seat belt reminder and
warning buzzer
● If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger
detection sensor may cause the warning light to flash and the warning
buzzer to sound even if a passenger is not sitting in the seat.
● If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sensor may not detect a passenger, and the warning light may not operate properly.
■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving
First check the following:
● Is the fuel tank empty?
If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately.
● Is the fuel tank cap loose?
If it is, tighten it securely.
The malfunction indicator lamp will go off after several driving trips.
If the malfunction indicator lamp does not go off even after several trips, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
■ When the tire pressure warning light comes on (if equipped)

Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level.
Pushing the tire pressure warning reset switch will not turn off the tire
pressure warning light.
■ The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes

(vehicles with a tire pressure warning system)
The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes such
as natural air leaks and tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the
warning light (after a few minutes).

418

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ When a tire is replaced with a spare tire (vehicles with a tire pres-

sure warning system)
The compact spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter. If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure warning light will
not turn off even though the flat tire has been replaced with the spare
tire. Replace the spare tire with the repaired tire and adjust the tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning light will go off after a few minutes.
■ If the tire pressure warning system is not functioning (vehicles with

a tire pressure warning system)
The tire pressure warning system will be disabled in the following conditions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)
● If tires not equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmit-

ters are used
● If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is

not registered in the tire pressure warning computer
● If the tire inflation pressure is 73 psi (500 kPa, 5.1 kgf/cm2 or bar) or

higher
The tire pressure warning system may be disabled in the following conditions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)
are nearby
● If a radio set at a similar frequency is in use in the vehicle
● If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed
● If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, particularly around the

wheels or wheel housings
● If non-genuine Toyota wheels are used. (Even if you use Toyota

wheels, the tire pressure warning system may not work properly with
some types of tires.)
● If tire chains are used

419

When trouble arises

● If electronic devices or facilities using similar radio wave frequencies

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking

for 1 minute (vehicles with a tire pressure warning system)
If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for 1
minute when the “POWER” switch is turned to ON mode, have it
checked by your Toyota dealer.
■ Electric power steering system warning light (warning buzzer)
When the 12-volt battery charge becomes insufficient or the voltage temporarily drops, the electric power steering system warning light may come on
and the warning buzzer may sound.
■ Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
The vehicle speed linked seat belt reminder buzzer can be disabled.
(Customizable features →P. 498) However, Toyota recommends that the
seat belt reminder buzzer be operational to alert the driver and front passenger when seat belts are not fastened.

CAUTION
■ When the electric power steering system warning light comes on
The steering wheel may become extremely heavy.
If the steering wheel becomes heavier than usual when operating, hold
firmly and operate using more force than usual.
■ If the tire pressure warning light comes on (vehicles with a tire

pressure warning system)
Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could
cause a loss of vehicle control and result in death or serious injury.
● Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire

inflation pressure immediately.
● If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pres-

sure adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires.
If a tire is flat, change it with the spare tire and have the flat tire
repaired by the nearest Toyota dealer.
● Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate,

you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.

420

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

CAUTION
■ If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur (vehicles with a tire

pressure warning system)
The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.
■ Maintenance of the tires (vehicles with a tire pressure warning sys-

tem)
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly
when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the
vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
label (tire and load information label). (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label [tire and load information label], you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that
illuminates a low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,
when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

421

When trouble arises

Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire
pressure warning light).

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

CAUTION
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning
system) malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure
warning light). When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended.
TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires
or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning
system) from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) to
continue to function properly.

NOTICE
■ Precaution when installing a different tire (vehicles with a tire pres-

sure warning system)
When a tire of a different specification or maker is installed, the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly.

422

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If a warning message is displayed
If a warning is shown on the multi-information display, stay calm and
perform the following actions:

Master warning light
The master warning light also
comes on or flashes in order to
indicate that a message is currently being displayed on the
multi-information display.

Multi-information display
If any of the warning lights comes on again after the following
actions have been performed, contact your Toyota dealer.

When trouble arises
423

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Stop the vehicle immediately.
A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-information display. The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to the vehicle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the
vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.
Warning message

Details

Indicates a malfunction in the hybrid system.
A buzzer also sounds.

424

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Have the vehicle inspected immediately.
A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-information display. Failure to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to the system operating abnormally and possibly
cause an accident. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
Warning message

Details

• Indicates a malfunction in the steering lock system.
• Indicates a malfunction in the smart key system.
A buzzer also sounds.
(Flashes)

Indicates a malfunction in the cruise control
system.

(If equipped)

425

When trouble arises

Indicates a malfunction in the Blind Spot Monitor.

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Follow the correction procedures.
A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-information display. After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the warning message goes off.
Warning message

Details

Correction procedure

Indicates that one or
more of the doors is
not fully closed.
The system also indicates which doors are
not fully closed.
If the vehicle reaches
a speed of 3 mph (5
km/h),

flashes

and a buzzer sounds
to indicate that the
door(s) are not yet
fully closed.

426

Make sure that all the
doors are closed.

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message

Details

Correction procedure

Indicates that the
hood is not fully
closed.
If the vehicle reaches
a speed of 3 mph (5
km/h),

flashes

Close the hood.

and a buzzer sounds
to indicate that the
hood is not yet fully
closed.
Indicates that the
trunk is not fully
closed.
If the vehicle reaches
a speed of 3 mph (5
km/h),

flashes

Close the trunk.

and a buzzer sounds
to indicate that the
trunk is not yet fully
closed.

When trouble arises

(Flashes)

Indicates that the
moon roof is not fully
closed (with the
“POWER” switch off
and the driver's door
opened).

Close the moon roof.

(If equipped)

427

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message

(U.S.A.)
(Canada)

Details

Correction procedure

Indicates, if the vehicle reaches a speed of
3 mph (5 km/h), that
the parking brake is
still engaged.
A buzzer also sounds.

Release the parking
brake.

Indicates that the
washer fluid level is
low.

Add washer fluid.

Indicates that the
Blind Spot Monitor
sensors or the surrounding area on the
bumper is dirty or
covered with ice.

Clean the sensor and
its surrounding area on
the bumper.

(Flashes)

(If equipped)

428

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message

Details
Indicates that all
maintenance according to the driven distance on the
maintenance schedule*1 should be performed soon.

(U.S.A. only)

If necessary, perform
maintenance.

Comes on approximately 4500 miles
(7200 km) after the
maintenance data has
been reset.
Indicates that all
maintenance is
required to correspond to the driven
distance on the maintenance schedule*1.

(U.S.A. only)

Correction procedure

Indicates that the
hybrid system has
overheated

When trouble arises

Comes on approximately 5000 miles
(8000 km) after the
maintenance data has
been reset.
(The indicator will not
work properly unless
the maintenance data
has been reset.)

Perform the necessary
maintenance.
Please reset the maintenance data after the
maintenance is performed.(→P. 338)

Stop and check.
(→P. 465)

429

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message

Details

Correction procedure

Indicates that the
hybrid battery (traction battery) is low
A buzzer also sounds.

When stopping the
vehicle for a long period
of time, shift the shift
lever to P. The hybrid
battery (traction battery)
cannot be charged with
the shift position in N.

Indicates that the
hybrid battery (traction battery) power
has dropped because
a long period of time
has elapsed after
shifting the shift lever
to N
A buzzer also sounds.

Restart the hybrid system when starting the
vehicle.

Indicates that the
driver’s door was
opened with the shift
position in any position other than P
A buzzer also sounds.

Shift the shift lever to P.

Indicates that the
accelerator pedal is
depressed while the
shift position is in N
A buzzer also sounds.

Release the accelerator pedal and shift the
shift lever to D, B or R.

(Flashes)

430

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message

Correction procedure

Indicates that the EV
drive mode is not
available*2
A buzzer also sounds.
The reason the EV
drive mode is not
available (the vehicle
is idling, battery
charge is low, speed is
higher than the EV
drive mode operating
speed range, accelerator pedal is
depressed too much)
may be displayed.

Use the EV drive mode
when it becomes available.

Indicates that the EV
drive mode has been
automatically cancelled*2
A buzzer also sounds.
The reason the EV
drive mode is not
available (the battery
charge is low, speed is
higher than the EV
drive mode speed
range, accelerator
pedal is depressed too
much) may be displayed.

Drive the vehicle for a
while.

When trouble arises

(Flashes 3
times)

Details

431

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message

(Flashes)

Details
Indicates that the
“POWER” switch is
turned off or turned to
ACCESSORY mode
and the driver's door
is opened while the
lights are turned on.
A buzzer also sounds.

Correction procedure

Turn the lights off.

*1: Refer to the separate “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s
Manual Supplement” for the maintenance interval applicable to your
vehicle.
*2: For the EV drive mode operating conditions (→P. 166).

432

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Have the malfunction repaired immediately.
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem,
check that the warning message and light go off.
Interior
buzzer

Once

Exterior
buzzer

Warning message

⎯

(Flashes)

Details

The electronic
key is not
detected when
an attempt is
made to start
the hybrid system.

Correction
procedure

Start the hybrid
system with the
electronic key
present.

When trouble arises
433

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Interior
buzzer

Once

Exterior
buzzer

Warning message

3 times

(Flashes)

434

Details

Correction
procedure

The electronic
key was carried
outside the
vehicle and a
door other than
the driver's door
was opened
and closed
while the
“POWER”
switch was in a
mode other
than off.

Bring the electronic key back
into the vehicle.

The electronic
key was carried
outside the
vehicle and the
driver’s door
was opened
and closed
while the shift
lever in P was
selected without turning off
the “POWER”
switch.

Turn the
“POWER”
switch off or
bring the electronic key back
into the vehicle.

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Interior
buzzer

Once

Exterior
buzzer

Warning message

Continuous

(Displayed alternately)

Details

An attempt was
made to exit the
vehicle with the
electronic key
and lock the
doors without
first turning the
“POWER”
switch off.

Correction
procedure

Turn the
“POWER”
switch off and
lock the doors
again.

(Flashes)

⎯

(Flashes)

Confirm that the
electronic key is
inside the vehicle.

435

When trouble arises

9 times

An attempt was
made to start
the hybrid system without the
electronic key
being present,
or the electronic key was
not functioning
normally.
An attempt was
made to drive
when the regular key was not
inside the vehicle.

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Interior
buzzer

Continuous

Exterior
buzzer

Warning message

⎯

(Flashes)

Continuous Continuous

(Displayed alternately)
(Flashes)

436

Details

Correction
procedure

The driver’s
door was
opened while
any shift lever
other than P
was selected
without turning
off the
“POWER”
switch.

Change the shift
lever to P.

The electronic
key was carried
outside the
vehicle and the
driver’s door
was opened
and closed
while any shift
lever other than
P was selected
without turning
off the
“POWER”
switch.

• Change the shift
lever to P.
• Bring the electronic key back
into the vehicle.

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Interior
buzzer

Once

Exterior
buzzer

Warning message

Continuous

(Flashes)

Once

Continuous

(Flashes)

Details

Correction
procedure

An attempt was
made to lock
the doors using
the smart key
system while
the electronic
key was still
inside the vehicle.

Retrieve the
electronic key
from the vehicle and lock the
doors again.

An attempt was
made to lock
either front door
by opening a
door and putting
the inside lock
button into the
lock position,
then closing the
door by pulling
on the outside
door handle
with the electronic key still
inside the vehicle.

Retrieve the
electronic key
from the vehicle and lock the
doors again.
5

When trouble arises
437

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Interior
buzzer

Once

Exterior
buzzer

Warning message

⎯

(Flashes)

Once

⎯

(Flashes)

438

Details

Correction
procedure

• When the doors
were unlocked
with the
mechanical key
and then the
“POWER”
switch was
pressed, the
electronic key
could not be
detected in the
vehicle.
• The electronic
key could not be
detected in the
vehicle even
after the
“POWER”
switch was
pressed two
consecutive
times.

Touch the electronic key to the
“POWER”
switch while
depressing the
brake pedal.

An attempt was
made to start
the hybrid system with the
shift lever in N.

Change the shift
lever to P and
start the hybrid
system.

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Interior
buzzer

⎯

Once

Details

Correction
procedure

⎯

Power was
turned off due to
the automatic
power off function.

Next time when
starting the
hybrid system,
increase the
engine speed
slightly and
maintain that
level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge
the 12-volt-battery.

⎯

The electronic
key has a low
battery.

Replace the
electronic key
battery.
(→P. 382)

Exterior
buzzer

Warning message

When trouble arises
439

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Interior
buzzer

Once

Exterior
buzzer

Warning message

⎯

(Flashes)

Once

⎯

(Flashes)

440

Details

Correction
procedure

The driver's
door was
opened and
closed with the
“POWER”
switch turned off
and then the
“POWER”
switch was put
in ACCESSORY mode
twice without
the hybrid system being
started.

Press the
“POWER”
switch while
depressing the
brake pedal.

During a hybrid
system starting
procedure in the
event that the
electronic key
was not functioning properly
(→P. 458), the
“POWER”
switch was
touched with
the electronic
key.

Press the
“POWER”
switch within 10
seconds of the
buzzer sounding.

The steering
lock could not
be released
within 3 seconds of the
“POWER”
switch being
pressed.

Press the
“POWER”
switch while
depressing the
brake pedal and
moving the
steering wheel
left and right.

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Interior
buzzer

Once

Exterior
buzzer

Warning message

⎯

(Flashes)

Once

⎯

(Flashes)

Details

Correction
procedure

The “POWER”
switch has been
turned off with
the shift lever in
a position other
than P.

Change the shift
lever to P.

After the
“POWER”
switch has been
turned off with
the shift lever in
a position other
than P, the shift
lever has been
shifted to P.

Turn the
“POWER”
switch off.

When trouble arises
441

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If you have a flat tire
Remove the flat tire and replace it with the spare provided.

■ Before jacking up the vehicle
● Stop the vehicle on a hard, flat surface.
● Set the parking brake.
● Shift the shift lever to P.
● Stop the hybrid system.
● Turn on the emergency flashers.
■ Location of the spare tire, jack and tools
Luggage floor
cover
Spare tire cover
Jack
Jack handle

Wheel nut
wrench

Spare tire

442

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Taking out the jack
STEP 1

Remove the luggage floor cover
and spare tire cover.

STEP 2

Remove the jack.

When trouble arises
443

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Taking out the spare tire
STEP 1

Remove the luggage floor cover
and spare tire cover.

STEP 2

Remove the tool tray.

STEP 3

Loosen the center fastener that
secures the spare tire.
When taking out or stowing the
spare tire, make sure to firmly
hold opposite ends of the tire.

444

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Replacing a flat tire
STEP 1

Chock the tires.

Flat tire

Lefthand
side

Behind the
rear righthand side
tire

Righthand
side

Behind the
rear lefthand side
tire

Lefthand
side

In front of
the front
right-hand
side tire

Righthand
side

In front of
the front
left-hand
side tire

Front

Rear

For vehicles with steel wheels,
remove the wheel ornament
using the wrench.
To protect the wheel ornament,
place a rag between the wrench
and the wheel ornament, as
shown in the illustration.

445

When trouble arises

STEP 2

Wheel
chock positions

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

STEP 3

Slightly loosen the wheel nuts
(one turn).

STEP 4

Turn the tire jack portion “A” by
hand until the notch of the jack is
in contact with the jack point.
The jack point guides are
located under the rocker panel.
They indicate the jack point
positions.

STEP 5

446

Raise the vehicle until the tire is
slightly raised off the ground.

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Remove all the wheel nuts and
the tire.

STEP 6

When resting the tire on the
ground, place the tire so that the
wheel design faces up to avoid
scratching the wheel surface.

Installing the spare tire
Remove any dirt or foreign matter from the wheel contact surface.

STEP 1

If foreign matter is on the wheel
contact surface, the wheel nuts
may loosen while the vehicle is
in motion, causing the tire to
come off.
STEP 2

Install the tire and loosely tighten each wheel nut by hand by
approximately the same amount.
Tapered portion

Disc wheel
seat

447

When trouble arises

When replacing a steel wheel
with a steel wheel, tighten the
wheel nuts until the tapered portion comes into loose contact
with the disc wheel seat.

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Tapered portion

When replacing an aluminum
wheel with a steel wheel, tighten
the wheel nuts until the tapered
portion comes into loose contact
with the disc wheel seat.

Disc wheel
seat
STEP 3

Lower the vehicle.

STEP 4

Firmly tighten each wheel nut
two or three times in the order
shown in the illustration.
Tightening torque:
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)

STEP 5

448

Stow the flat tire, tire jack and all tools.

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ The compact spare tire
● The compact spare tire is identified by the label “TEMPORARY USE

ONLY” on the tire sidewall.
Use the compact spare tire temporarily, and only in an emergency.
● Make sure to check the tire inflation pressure of the compact spare

tire. (→P. 480)
■ After completing the tire change (vehicles with a tire pressure

warning system)
The tire pressure warning system must be reset. (→P. 366)
■ When using the compact spare tire

As the compact spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter, low inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be
indicated by the tire pressure warning system. Also, if you replace the
compact spare tire after the tire pressure warning light comes on, the
light remains on.
■ If you have a flat front tire on a road covered with snow or ice

Install the compact spare tire on one of the rear wheels of the vehicle.
Perform the following steps and fit tire chains to the front tires:
STEP 1

Replace a rear tire with the compact spare tire.

STEP 2

Replace the flat front tire with the tire removed from the rear of
the vehicle.

STEP 3

Fit tire chains to the front tires.

When trouble arises
449

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

CAUTION
■ When using the compact spare tire
● Remember that the compact spare tire provided is specifically designed

for use with your vehicle. Do not use your compact spare tire on another
vehicle.
● Do not use more than one compact spare tire simultaneously.
● Replace the compact spare tire with a standard tire as soon as possible.
● Avoid sudden acceleration, deceleration and braking, as well as sharp

cornering.
■ When storing the compact spare tire

Be careful not to catch fingers or other body parts between the compact
spare tire and the body of the vehicle.
■ When the compact spare tire is attached

The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following systems may not operate correctly:
● ABS & Brake assist
● Cruise control
● VSC
● TRAC
● EPS
● Navigation system (if equipped)
■ Speed limit when using the compact spare tire

Do not drive at speeds in excess of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a compact
spare tire is installed on the vehicle.
The compact spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failure
to observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.

450

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

CAUTION
■ Using the tire jack

Improper use of the tire jack may cause the vehicle to suddenly fall off
the jack, leading to death or serious injury.
● Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or

installing and removing tire chains.
● Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat

tire.
Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for
replacing tires on this vehicle.
● Always check that the tire jack is securely set to the jack point.
● Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while it is supported

by the jack.
● Do not start or run the hybrid system while your vehicle is supported by

the jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is inside.
● When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to

replace the tire.
5

● Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.

451

When trouble arises

Take particular care when lowering the vehicle to ensure that no one
working on or near the vehicle may be injured.

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

CAUTION
■ Replacing a flat tire
● Do not touch the disc wheels or the area around the brakes immedi-

ately after the vehicle has been driven.
After the vehicle has been driven the disc wheels and the area around
the brakes will be extremely hot. Touching these areas with hands, feet
or other body parts while changing a tire, etc. may result in burns.
● Failure to follow these precautions could cause the wheel nuts to

loosen and the tire to fall off, resulting in death or serious injury.
• Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 76 ft•lbf (103
N•m, 10.5 kgf•m) as soon as possible after changing wheels.
• Do not attach a heavily damaged wheel ornament, as it may fly off
the wheel while the vehicle is moving.
• When installing a tire, only use wheel nuts that have been specifically designed for that wheel.
• If there are any cracks or deformations in the bolt screws, nut
threads or bolt holes of the wheel, have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
• When installing the wheel nuts, be sure to install them with the
tapered ends facing inward. (→P. 378)

452

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

NOTICE
■ Do not drive the vehicle with a flat tire.

Do not continue driving with a flat tire.
Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the
wheel beyond repair.
■ Be careful when driving over bumps with the compact spare tire

installed on the vehicle.
The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the compact spare tire
compared to when driving with standard tires. Be careful when driving
over uneven road surfaces.
■ Driving with tire chains and the compact spare tire

Do not fit tire chains to the compact spare tire.
Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving
performance.
■ When replacing the tires (vehicles with a tire pressure warning sys-

tem)
When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.
■ To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmit-

ters (vehicles with a tire pressure warning system)

453

When trouble arises

When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is
used, contact your Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop as soon
as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter when replacing the tire. (→P. 366)

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the hybrid system will not start
Reasons for the hybrid system not starting vary depending on the
situation. Check the following and perform the appropriate procedure:

■ The hybrid system will not start even though the correct
starting procedure is being followed. (→P. 159)
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
● The electronic key may not be functioning properly. (→P. 459)
● There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank.
Refuel the vehicle.
● There may be a malfunction in the immobilizer system.
(→P. 108)
● There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system.
● The hybrid system may be malfunctioning due to an electrical
problem such as an open circuit or a blown fuse. However,
depending on the type of malfunction, an interim measure is
available to start the hybrid system. (→P. 455)
■ The interior lights and headlights are dim, or the horn does
not sound or sounds at a low volume.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
● The 12-volt battery may be discharged. (→P. 461)
● The 12-volt battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.

454

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ The interior lights and headlights do not turn on, or the horn
does not sound.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
● One or both of the 12-volt battery terminals may be disconnected.
● The 12-volt battery may be discharged. (→P. 461)
Contact your Toyota dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if
repair procedures are unknown.

Emergency start function
When the hybrid system does not start, the following steps can be
used as an interim measure to start the hybrid system if the
“POWER” switch is functioning normally:
STEP 1

Set the parking brake.

STEP 2

Shift the shift lever to P.

STEP 3

Turn the “POWER” switch to ACCESSORY mode.

STEP 4

Press and hold the “POWER” switch for about 15 seconds
while depressing the brake pedal firmly.

455

When trouble arises

Even if the hybrid system can be started using the above steps, the
system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake pedal,
there may be a problem with the shift lock system (a system to prevent accidental operation of the shift lever). Have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to
ensure that the shift lever can be shifted:
STEP 1

Set the parking brake.

STEP 2

Turn the “POWER” switch to ACCESSORY mode.

STEP 3

Depress the brake pedal.

STEP 4

Pry the cover up with a flathead screwdriver or equivalent.

STEP 5

Press the shift lock override
button.
The shift lever can be shifted
while the button is pressed.

456

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If you lose your keys
New genuine Toyota keys can be made by your Toyota dealer using
the other key and the key number stamped on your key number
plate.

When trouble arises
457

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the electronic key does not operate properly
If communication between the electronic key and vehicle is interrupted (→P. 60) or the electronic key cannot be used because the
battery is depleted, the smart key system and wireless remote control cannot be used. In such cases, the doors and trunk can be
opened and the hybrid system can be started by following the procedure below.

Locking and unlocking the doors and key linked functions
Use the mechanical key
(→P. 50) in order to perform the
following operations (driver’s
door only):
Locks all doors
Closes the windows and moon
roof (turn and hold)*
Unlocks all doors
Turning the key rearward unlocks
the driver’s door. Turning the key
once again unlocks the other
doors.

Opens the windows and moon
roof (turn and hold)*
*: This setting must be customized at your Toyota dealer.

458

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Starting the hybrid system
STEP 1

Ensure that the shift lever is in P and depress the brake pedal.

STEP 2

Touch the Toyota emblem side of
the electronic key to the
“POWER” switch.
The “POWER” switch will turn to
ON mode.

When the smart key system is deactivated in customization setting,
the “POWER” switch will turn to ACCESSORY mode. Modes can be
changed by pressing the “POWER” switch with brake pedal released.
(The mode changes each time the switch is pressed.)
STEP 3

Firmly depress the brake pedal and check that

is dis-

played on the multi-information display.
STEP 4

Press the “POWER” switch.

459

When trouble arises

In the event that the “POWER” switch still cannot be operated, contact your Toyota dealer.

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ Stopping the hybrid system
Shift the shift lever to P and press the “POWER” switch as you normally do
when stopping the hybrid system.
■ Replacing the key battery
As the above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended that the
electronic key battery be replaced immediately when the battery is depleted.
(→P. 382)
■ If the doors cannot be locked or unlocked by the smart key system
Lock and unlock the doors by the mechanical key or wireless remote control.
■ When the electronic key does not work properly
● Make sure that the smart key system has not been deactivated in the
customization setting. If it is off, turn the function on.
(Customizable features →P. 498)
● Check if battery-saving mode is set. If it is set, cancel the function.
(→P. 59)

460

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the vehicle’s 12-volt battery is discharged
The following procedures may be used to start the hybrid system if
the vehicle's 12-volt battery is discharged.
You can also call your Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop.

If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your vehicle by following the steps below.
STEP 1

Open the trunk lid and remove the 12-volt battery cover.
(→P. 361)

STEP 2

Connect the jumper cables according to the following procedure:

Connect a positive jumper cable clamp to the positive (+) battery
terminal on the second vehicle
Connect a negative cable clamp to the negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle
Connect the jumper cable to ground on your vehicle as shown in
the illustration.

461

When trouble arises

Connect a positive jumper cable clamp to the exclusive jump
starting terminal on your vehicle

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

STEP 3

Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the gasoline engine speed slightly and maintain at that level for
approximately 5 minutes to recharge the 12-volt battery of
your vehicle.

STEP 4

Open and close any of the doors with the “POWER” switch
OFF.

STEP 5

Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and turn
the “POWER” switch to ON mode, then start the hybrid system.

STEP 6

Make sure the “READY” indicator comes on. If the indicator
does not come on, contact your Toyota dealer.

STEP 7

Once the hybrid system has started, remove the jumper
cables in the exact reverse order from which they were connected.

Once the hybrid system starts, have the vehicle checked at your
Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

■ Starting the hybrid system when the 12-volt battery is discharged
The hybrid system cannot be started by push-starting.
■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
● Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the hybrid system is
off.
● Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running at a low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic.
■ When the 12-volt battery is removed or discharged
The hybrid system may not start. (→P. 362)

462

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ Charging the 12-volt battery
The electricity stored in the 12-volt battery will discharge gradually even
when the vehicle is not in use, due to natural discharge and the draining
effects of certain electrical appliances. If the vehicle is left for a long time, the
12-volt battery may discharge, and the hybrid system may be unable to start.
(The 12-volt battery recharges automatically while the hybrid system is operating.)
■ Precautions when the 12-volt battery is discharged
● In some cases, it may not be possible to unlock the doors using the smart
key system when the battery is discharged. Use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key to lock or unlock the doors.
● The hybrid system may not start on the first attempt after the 12-volt battery has recharged but will start normally after the second attempt. This is
not a malfunction.
● The “POWER” switch mode is memorized by the vehicle. When the 12volt battery is reconnected, the system will return to the mode it was in
before the 12-volt battery was discharged. Before disconnecting the 12volt battery, turn the “POWER” switch off.
If you are unsure what mode the “POWER” switch was in before the 12volt battery discharged, be especially careful when reconnecting the 12volt battery.
5

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flammable gas that may be emitted from the 12-volt battery:
● Make sure each jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that
it is not unintentionally in contact with any other than the intended terminal.
● Do not allow the + and - clamps of the jumper cables to come into contact
with each other.
● Do not smoke, use matches, cigarette lighters or allow open flame near
the 12-volt battery.

463

When trouble arises

■ Avoiding 12-volt battery fires or explosions

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

CAUTION
■ 12-volt battery precautions
The 12-volt battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte,
while related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following
precautions when handling the 12-volt battery:
● When working with the 12-volt battery, always wear safety glasses and
take care not to allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with
skin, clothing or the vehicle body.
● Do not lean over the 12-volt battery.
● In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes,
immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.
Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention
can be received.
● Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and
other battery-related parts.
● Do not allow children near the 12-volt battery.
■ After recharging the 12-volt battery
Have the 12-volt battery inspected at your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
If the 12-volt battery is deteriorating, continued use may cause the 12-volt
battery to emit a malodorous gas, which may be detrimental to the health of
passengers.
■ When replacing the 12-volt battery
→P. 364

464

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If your vehicle overheats
The following may indicate that your vehicle is overheating:

● The rightmost segment of the engine coolant temperature display is flashing:
The engine may be overheating.
● “HYBRID SYSTEM OVERHEAT” is shown on the multi-information display:
The electric motor or power control unit may be overheating.
Follow the correction procedure as described below.

Correction procedures
■ If the rightmost segment of the engine coolant temperature
display are flashing
STEP 1

Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air conditioning system.

STEP 2

Check to see if steam is coming out from the engine area.
If you see steam:
Stop the hybrid system. Carefully lift the hood after the
steam subsides and then restart the hybrid system.

STEP 3

Check to see if the cooling fans are operating.
If the fans are operating:
Wait until the rightmost segment of the engine coolant temperature display stops flashing and returns to normal display. Then stop the hybrid system.
If the fans are not operating:
Stop the hybrid system immediately and call your Toyota
dealer.

465

When trouble arises

If you do not see steam:
Leave the hybrid system operating and carefully lift the
hood.

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

STEP 4

After the hybrid system has
cooled down sufficiently, check
the engine coolant level and
inspect the radiator core (radiator) for any leaks.

STEP 5

Add engine coolant if necessary.
Water can be used in an emergency if engine coolant is unavailable. (→P. 477)

Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest Toyota dealer as soon as
possible.
■ If “HYBRID SYSTEM OVERHEAT” is shown on the multi-information display
STEP 1

Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air conditioning system.

STEP 2

Leave the hybrid system operating and carefully lift the hood.

STEP 3

Check if the cooling fans are operating.
If the fans are operating:
Wait until the “HYBRID SYSTEM OVERHEAT” message
disappears and then stop the hybrid system.
If the message does not disappear, call your Toyota dealer.
If the fans are not operating:
Stop the hybrid system immediately and call your Toyota
dealer.

466

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

STEP 4

After the hybrid system has
cooled down, check the power
control unit coolant level and
inspect the cooling system for
leaks.

STEP 5

Add power control unit coolant if
necessary.
Water can be used in an emergency if power control unit coolant is unavailable. (→P. 477)

Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest Toyota dealer as soon as
possible.
5

■ Overheating
The following symptoms may occur when your vehicle is overheating:
● Steam comes out from the engine area.
● “HYBRID SYSTEM OVERHEAT” is shown on the multi-information display.

467

When trouble arises

● Hybrid system output decreases.

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

CAUTION
■ To prevent an accident or injury when inspecting under the hood of
your vehicle
● If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until
the steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot, causing serious injury such as burns.
● Check that

on the multi-information display and the “READY” indi-

cator are off.
● For vehicle with a hybrid system, there are times when the gasoline
engine automatically starts to run or the cooling fans suddenly start to
operate. Do not touch or approach the rotating parts of the belt or fans.
Doing so may lead to fingers, clothes or tools getting caught, resulting in
injury.
● Do not loosen the coolant reservoir cap while the hybrid system and radiator are hot.
Serious injury, such as burns, may result from hot coolant and steam
released under pressure.

NOTICE
■ When adding engine/power control unit coolant
Wait until the hybrid system has cooled down before adding engine/power
control unit coolant.
When adding coolant, do so slowly. Adding cool coolant to a hot hybrid system too quickly can cause damage to the hybrid system.
■ To prevent damage to the cooling system
Observe the following precautions:
● Avoid contaminating the coolant with foreign matter (such as sand or dust
etc.)
● Do not use commercially available coolant additives.

468

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the vehicle becomes stuck
Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle
becomes stuck in mud, dirt or snow:
STEP 1

Stop the hybrid system. Set the parking brake and shift the
shift lever to P.

STEP 2

Remove the mud, snow or sand from around the stuck tire.

STEP 3

Place wood, stones or some other material under the tires
to help provide traction.

STEP 4

Restart the hybrid system.

STEP 5

Shift the shift lever to the D or R position and carefully apply
the accelerator to free the vehicle.
Turn off TRAC and VSC if these functions are hampering your
attempts to free the vehicle. (→P. 209)

CAUTION
■ When attempting to free a stuck vehicle
If you choose to push the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the surrounding area is clear to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or people. The
vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free.
Use extreme caution.
Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may
cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

NOTICE
■ To avoid damage to the transmission and other components
● Avoid spinning the wheels and depressing the accelerator pedal more
than necessary.
● If the vehicle remains stuck even after these procedures are performed,
the vehicle may require towing to be freed.
469

When trouble arises

■ When shifting the shift lever

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency
Only in an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the
vehicle in the normal way, stop the vehicle using the following procedure:
STEP 1

Steadily step on the brake pedal with both feet and firmly
depress it.
Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly as this will increase the
effort required to slow the vehicle.

STEP 2

Shift the shift lever to N.

If the shift lever is shifted to N
STEP 3

After slowing down, stop the vehicle in a safe place by the
road.

STEP 4

Stop the hybrid system.

If the shift lever cannot be shifted to N
STEP 3

Keep depressing the brake pedal with both feet to reduce
vehicle speed as much as possible.

STEP 4

To stop the hybrid system,
press and hold the “POWER”
switch for 2 consecutive seconds or more, or press it
briefly 3 times or more in succession.

Press and hold for 2 seconds or more,
or press briefly 3 times or more
STEP 5

Stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.

CAUTION
■ If the hybrid system has to be turned off while driving
Power assist for the brakes and steering wheel will be lost, making the brake
pedal harder to depress and the steering wheel heavier to turn. Decelerate
as much as possible before turning off the hybrid system.
470

6-1. Specifications

Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)
Dimensions and weights
Overall length

189.2 in. (4805 mm)

Overall width

71.7 in. (1820 mm)

Overall height*1

57.9 in. (1470 mm)

Wheelbase

109.3 in. (2775 mm)
Front

62.0 in. (1575 mm)*2
62.4 in. (1585 mm)*3

Rear

61.6 in. (1565 mm)*2
62.0 in. (1575 mm)*3

Tread

Vehicle capacity weight
(Occupants + luggage)

*1:
*2:
*3:

905 lb. (410 kg)

Unladen vehicles
P215/55R17 tires
P205/65R16 tires

Vehicle identification
■ Vehicle identification number
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your
vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your Toyota. It is
used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.
This number is located on the
top left of the instrument panel.

472

6-1. Specifications

This number is also on the Certification Label.

■ Engine number
The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown.

Vehicle specifications
473

6-1. Specifications

Engine
Model

2AR-FXE

Type

4-cylinder in line, 4-cycle, gasoline

Bore and stroke

3.54 × 3.86 in. (90.0 × 98.0 mm)

Displacement

152.2 cu.in. (2494 cm3)

Valve clearance
(engine cold)

Automatic adjustment

Fuel
Fuel type

Unleaded gasoline only

Octane rating

87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher

Fuel tank capacity
(Reference)

17.0 gal. (64.35 L, 14.2 Imp. gal.)

Electric motor (Traction motor)
Type

Permanent magnet synchronous motor

Maximum output

105 kW

Maximum torque

199 ft•lbf (270 N•m, 27.5 kgf•m)

Hybrid battery (Traction battery)
Type

Nickel-metal hydride battery

Voltage

7.2 V/module

Capacity

6.5 Ah (3HR)

Quantity

34 modules

Overall voltage

244.8 V

474

6-1. Specifications

Lubrication system
Oil capacity
(Drain and refill ⎯ reference*)
With filter
Without filter

4.6 qt. (4.4 L, 3.9 Imp. qt.)
4.2 qt. (4.0 L, 3.5 Imp. qt.)

*: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing the
engine oil. Warm up the engine and turn off the hybrid system, wait more
than 5 minutes, and check the oil level on the dipstick.

■ Engine oil selection
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Toyota vehicle. Use
Toyota approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy
the following grade and viscosity.
Oil grade: ILSAC GF-5 multigrade engine oil
Recommended viscosity: SAE 0W-20
SAE 0W-20 is the best choice for
good fuel economy and good
starting in cold weather.

Outside temperature

If SAE 0W-20 is not available,
SAE 5W-20 oil may be used.
However, it must be replaced
with SAE 0W-20 at the next oil
change.

Vehicle specifications
475

6-1. Specifications

Oil viscosity (0W-20 is explained here as an example):
• The 0W in 0W-20 indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows
cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier
starting of the engine in cold weather.
• The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil when
the oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity (one with a
higher value) may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high
speeds, or under extreme load conditions.

How to read oil container label:
The ILSAC (International Lubricant Standardization and Approval
Committee) Certification Mark is added to some oil containers to help
you select the oil you should use.

476

6-1. Specifications

Cooling system
Capacity
(Reference)
Gasoline engine
Power control
unit

Coolant type

7.6 qt. (7.2 L, 6.3 Imp. qt.)
3.4 qt. (3.2 L, 2.8 Imp. qt.)
Use either of the following:
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
• A similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant
with long-life hybrid organic acid technology
Do not use plain water alone.

Ignition system
Spark plug
Make

DENSO FK16HR-A8

Gap

0.031 in. (0.8 mm)

NOTICE
■ Iridium-tipped spark plugs
Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust the spark plug gap.

Vehicle specifications
477

6-1. Specifications

Electrical system
Battery

Open voltage* at
68°F (20°C):

12.6 ⎯ 12.8 V Fully charged
12.2 ⎯ 12.4 V Half charged
11.8 ⎯ 12.0 V Discharged
(*: Voltage checked 20 minutes after the
engine and all the lights are turned off)

Charging rates

5 A max.

Transmission
Fluid capacity*

3.9 qt. (3.7 L, 3.3 Imp. qt.)

Fluid type

Toyota Genuine ATF WS

*: The fluid capacity is a reference quantity. If replacement is necessary, contact your Toyota dealer.

NOTICE
■ Transmission fluid type
Using transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may ultimately damage the transmission of your vehicle.

478

6-1. Specifications

Brakes
Pedal clearance*1

3.62 in. (92 mm)

Pedal free play

0.04 ⎯ 0.24 in. (1 ⎯ 6 mm)

Brake pad wear limit

0.04 in. (1.0 mm)

Parking brake lining wear limit

0.04 in. (1.0 mm)

Parking brake pedal travel*2

7 ⎯ 10 clicks

Fluid type

SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3

*1:

Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 112 lbf (500 N,
51 kgf) while the hybrid system is operating

*2:

Parking brake pedal travel when depressed with a force of 67 lbf (300 N, 31
kgf).

Vehicle specifications
479

6-1. Specifications

Steering
Free play

Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)

Tires and wheels
16-inch tires
Tire size

P205/65R16 94S, T155/70D17 110M

Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)

Driving under normal conditions
Front: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Rear: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Spare:
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Driving at high speeds (above 100 mph [160
km/h]) (in countries where such speeds are
permitted by law)
Add 3 psi (20 kPa, 0.2 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the
front tires and rear tires. Never exceed the
maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.

Wheel size

16 × 6 1/2 JJ, 17 × 4 T (compact spare)

Wheel nut torque

76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)

480

6-1. Specifications

17-inch tires
Tire size

P215/55R17 93V, T155/70D17 110M

Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)

Wheel size

17 × 7 J, 17 × 4 T (compact spare)

Wheel nut torque

76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)

Vehicle specifications
481

6-1. Specifications

Light bulbs
Light Bulbs

Bulb No.

Type

⎯

9005

Front side marker
lights

⎯

Rear side marker
lights

⎯

Front turn signal/parking lights

⎯

28/8

Rear turn signal lights

⎯

Stop/tail lights

⎯

21/5

License plate lights

⎯

921

Fog lights*

⎯

Interior/front personal
lights

⎯

Interior/rear personal
lights*

⎯

Rear interior light*

⎯

168

⎯

194

3.8

Headlights
Low beam
(halogen bulbs)*
Low beam
(discharge bulbs)*
High beam

Exterior

Back-up lights

Interior

Door courtesy lights
Vanity lights*
Trunk light
*:
A:
C:
E:
482

If equipped
H11 halogen bulbs
D4S discharge bulbs
Wedge base bulbs (amber)

B: HB3 halogen bulbs
D: Wedge base bulbs (clear)
F: Double end bulbs

6-1. Specifications

Fuel information
You must only use unleaded gasoline in your vehicle.
Select octane rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher. Use
of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 87 may result
in engine knocking. Persistent knocking can lead to engine damage.

At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications
of ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB3.5-M93 in Canada.

■ Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline
To help prevent incorrect fueling, your vehicle has a fuel tank opening that
only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.
■ Gasoline quality
In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gasoline you are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of
gasoline. If this does not correct the problem, consult your Toyota dealer.
■ Gasoline quality standards
● Automotive manufacturers in the U.S.A., Europe and Japan have developed a specification for fuel quality called the World-Wide Fuel Charter
(WWFC), which is expected to be applied worldwide.
● The WWFC consists of four categories that are based on required emission levels. In the U.S., category 4 has been adopted.
● The WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets,
and improves customer satisfaction through better performance.
6

Vehicle specifications
483

6-1. Specifications

■ Recommendation of the use of gasoline containing detergent additives
● Toyota recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives
to avoid the build-up of engine deposits.
● All gasoline sold in the U.S.A. contains detergent additives to clean and/
or keep clean intake systems.
■ Recommendation of the use of cleaner burning gasoline
Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxygenates such as ethanol or MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) is available in
many areas.
Toyota recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and appropriately
blended reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent
vehicle performance, reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
■ Non-recommendation of the use of blended gasoline
DO NOT use gasoline
containing more than 10%
ethanol.
(15% ethanol)
(50% ethanol)
(85% ethanol)

● Use only gasoline containing a maximum of 10% ethanol.
DO NOT use any flex-fuel or gasoline
that could contain more than 10% ethanol, including from any pump labeled
E15, E30, E50, E85 (which are only
some examples of fuel containing more
than 10% ethanol).

● If you use gasohol in your vehicle, be sure that it has an octane rating no
lower than 87.
● Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.

484

6-1. Specifications

■ Non-recommendation of the use of gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contains an octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).
Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel
containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely
affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If
this happens, contact your Toyota dealer for service.
■ If your engine knocks
● Consult your Toyota dealer.
● You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.

NOTICE
■ Notice on fuel quality
● Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used, the engine will be
damaged.
● Do not use leaded gasoline.
Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle’s three-way catalytic
converters causing the emission control system to malfunction.
● Do not use gasohol other than the type previously stated.
Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems.

■ Fuel-related poor driveability
If poor driveability is encountered after using a different type of fuel (poor hot
starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.), discontinue the use of that type
of fuel.
■ When refueling with gasohol
Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle's paint.

485

Vehicle specifications

● Using unleaded gasoline with an octane number or rating lower than the
level previously stated will cause persistent heavy knocking.
At worst, this will lead to engine damage.

6-1. Specifications

Tire information
Typical tire symbols

Full-size tire

Compact spare tire

Tire size

(→P. 489)

DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)

(→P. 488)

Uniform tire quality grading
For details, see “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” that follows.

Location of treadwear indicators
486

(→P. 365)

6-1. Specifications

Tire ply composition and materials
Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the
strands which form the plies in a tire.

Radial tires or bias-ply tires
A radial tire has “RADIAL” on the sidewall. A tire not marked
“RADIAL” is a bias-ply tire.

TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE
A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly put into the
tire. A tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pressure.

Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure

(→P. 368)

Maximum cold tire inflation pressure

(→P. 480)

This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.

Summer tires or all season tires

(→P. 369)

An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked
“M+S” is a summer tire.

“TEMPORARY USE ONLY”

(→P. 449)

A compact spare tire is identified by the phrase “TEMPORARY USE
ONLY” molded on its sidewall. This tire is designed for temporary
emergency use only.

Vehicle specifications
487

6-1. Specifications

Typical DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)
DOT symbol*
Tire Identification
(TIN)

Number

Tire manufacturer's identification mark
Tire size code
Manufacturer's optional
type code (3 or 4 letters)

tire

Manufacturing week
Manufacturing year

*: The

DOT symbol certifies
that the tire conforms to
applicable Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards.

488

6-1. Specifications

Tire size
■ Typical tire size information
The illustration indicates typical
tire size.
Tire use
(P = Passenger car,
T = Temporary use)
Section width (millimeters)
Aspect ratio
(tire height to section width)
Tire construction code
(R = Radial, D = Diagonal)
Wheel diameter (inches)
Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)
Speed symbol
(alphabet with one letter)
■ Tire dimensions
Section width
Tire height
Wheel diameter
6

Vehicle specifications
489

6-1. Specifications

Tire section names
Bead
Sidewall
Shoulder
Tread
Belt
Inner liner
Reinforcing rubber
Carcass
Rim lines
Bead wires
Chafer
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations
issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the
U.S. Department of Transportation.
It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Toyota
vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading.
Your Toyota dealer will help answer any questions you may have as
you read this information.

■ DOT quality grades
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety
Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be
found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

490

6-1. Specifications

■ Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear
rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2) times
as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of
their use. Performance may differ significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

■ Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C,
and they represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on specified government
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking
(straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction.

■ Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to
dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.

Grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

491

Vehicle specifications

Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead
to sudden tire failure.

6-1. Specifications

Warning: The temperature grades of a tire assume that it is properly
inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately
or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

Glossary of tire terminology
Tire related term

Meaning

Cold tire inflation pressure

Tire pressure when the vehicle has been
parked for three hours or more, or has not
been driven more than 1 mile or 1.5 km under
that condition

Maximum inflation
pressure

The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a
tire may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of
the tire

Recommended inflation pressure

Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a
manufacturer

Accessory weight

The combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power
brakes, power windows, power seats, radio
and heater, to the extent that these items are
available as factory-installed equipment
(whether installed or not)

Curb weight

The weight of a motor vehicle with standard
equipment, including the maximum capacity of
fuel, oil and coolant, and if so equipped, air
conditioning and additional weight optional
engine

Maximum loaded vehicle weight

The sum of:
(a) Curb weight
(b) Accessory weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight
(d) Production options weight

492

6-1. Specifications

Tire related term

Meaning
150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants
specified in the second column of Table 1* that
follows

Occupant distribution

Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table 1* below

Production options
weight

The combined weight of installed regular production options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in
excess of the standard items which they
replace, not previously considered in curb
weight or accessory weight, including heavy
duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty
battery, and special trim

Rim

A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire beads are seated

Rim diameter
(Wheel diameter)

Nominal diameter of the bead seat

Rim size designation

Rim diameter and width

Rim type designation

The industry manufacturer's designation for a
rim by style or code

Rim width

Nominal distance between rim flanges

Vehicle capacity
weight (Total load
capacity)

The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb.
(68 kg) times the vehicle's designated seating
capacity

Vehicle maximum load
on the tire

The load on an individual tire that is determined
by distributing to each axle its share of the
maximum loaded vehicle weight, and dividing
by two

Vehicle normal load
on the tire

The load on an individual tire that is determined
by distributing to each axle its share of curb
weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight (distributed in accordance with
Table 1* below), and dividing by two

493

Vehicle specifications

Normal occupant
weight

6-1. Specifications

Tire related term

Meaning

Weather side

The surface area of the rim not covered by the
inflated tire

Bead

The part of the tire that is made of steel wires,
wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is
shaped to fit the rim

Bead separation

A breakdown of the bond between components
in the bead

Bias ply tire

A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid at alternate angles
substantially less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread

Carcass

The tire structure, except tread and sidewall
rubber which, when inflated, bears the load

Chunking

The breaking away of pieces of the tread or
sidewall

Cord

The strands forming the plies in the tire

Cord separation

The parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds

Cracking

Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or innerliner of the tire extending to cord material

A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire
and rim system in which the rim is designed
with rim flanges pointed radially inward and the
tire is designed to fit on the underside of the
rim in a manner that encloses the rim flanges
inside the air cavity of the tire

Extra load tire

A tire designed to operate at higher loads and
at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire

Groove

The space between two adjacent tread ribs

Innerliner

The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a
tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium
within the tire

494

6-1. Specifications

Tire related term

Meaning
The parting of the innerliner from cord material
in the carcass

Intended outboard
sidewall

(a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding
that is higher or deeper than the same
molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or
(b) The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
must always face outward when mounted
on a vehicle

Light truck (LT) tire

A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on lightweight trucks or
multipurpose passenger vehicles

Load rating

The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry
for a given inflation pressure

Maximum load rating

The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire

Maximum permissible
inflation pressure

The maximum cold inflation pressure to which
a tire may be inflated

Measuring rim

The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical
dimension requirements

Open splice

Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or
innerliner that extends to cord material

Outer diameter

The overall diameter of an inflated new tire

Overall width

The linear distance between the exteriors of
the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to labeling, decorations, or protective
bands or ribs

Passenger car tire

A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that
have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of
10,000 lb. or less.
495

Vehicle specifications

Innerliner separation

6-1. Specifications

Tire related term

Meaning

Ply

A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords

Ply separation

A parting of rubber compound between adjacent plies

Pneumatic tire

A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materials, that,
when mounted on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and contains the gas or fluid
that sustains the load

Radial ply tire

A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90
degrees to the centerline of the tread

Reinforced tire

A tire designed to operate at higher loads and
at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire

Section width

The linear distance between the exteriors of
the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to labeling, decoration, or protective bands

Sidewall

That portion of a tire between the tread and
bead

Sidewall separation

The parting of the rubber compound from the
cord material in the sidewall

Snow tire

A tire that attains a traction index equal to or
greater than 110, compared to the ASTM E1136 Standard Reference Test Tire, when
using the snow traction test as described in
ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test Method for
Single Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight Line
on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and which
is marked with an Alpine Symbol (
least one sidewall

Test rim
496

) on at

The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and
may be any rim listed as appropriate for use
with that tire

6-1. Specifications

Tire related term

Meaning

Tread

That portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road

Tread rib

A tread section running circumferentially
around a tire

Tread separation

Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass

Treadwear indicators
(TWI)

The projections within the principal grooves
designed to give a visual indication of the
degrees of wear of the tread

Wheel-holding fixture

The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire
assembly securely during testing

*: Table 1 ⎯ Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load
for various designated seating capacities
Designated seating
capacity, Number of
occupants

Vehicle normal load,
Number of occupants

Occupant distribution in
a normally loaded vehicle

2 through 4

2 in front

5 through 10

2 in front, 1 in second
seat

11 through 15

2 in front, 1 in second
seat, 1 in third seat, 1
in fourth seat

2 in front, 2 in second
seat, 2 in third seat, 1
in fourth seat

16 through 20

Vehicle specifications

497

6-2. Customization

Customizable features
Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be personalized to suit your preferences. Programming these preferences
requires specialized equipment and may be performed by your
Toyota dealer.
Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions
being customized. Contact your Toyota dealer for further details.

Customizable Features
Vehicles with a Display Audio system: Settings that can be
changed using the Display Audio system
(For further information on customizing settings using the Display
Audio system, refer to the “Display Audio System Owner’s Manual”.)
Vehicles with a navigation system: Settings that can be changed
using the navigation system
(For further information on customizing settings using the navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.)
Settings that can be changed by your Toyota dealer
Definition of symbols: O = Available, — = Not available

498

6-2. Customization

Item

Smart key
system and
wireless
remote
control
(→P. 53,
66)

Smart key
system
(→P. 53)

Default setting

Customized
setting

Operation signal
(Emergency
flashers)

Off

—

Operation signal
(Buzzer)

Off

—

Operation
buzzer volume

Level 5

Off to level 7

—

Function

Time elapsed
before automatic door lock
function is activated if door is
not opened
after being
unlocked

60 seconds

Open door
warning buzzer

Off

—

Smart key system

Off

—

Number of permissible times
of continuous
smart lock

Twice

Unlimited

—

Off

30 seconds

120 seconds

Vehicle specifications
499

6-2. Customization

Item

Function

Default setting

Customized
setting

Wireless
remote control

Off

—

Driver's door
unlocked in
one step, all
doors
unlocked in
two steps

All doors
unlocked in
one step.

Off

—

Unlocking
operation
Wireless
remote
control
(→P. 66)

Panic function

Off
Press twice
Trunk unlocking operation

Press and
hold (short)

One short
press
Press and
hold (long)

500

6-2. Customization

Item

Default setting

Customized
setting

Driver's door
unlocked in
one step, all
doors
unlocked in
two steps

All doors
unlocked in
one step.

—

Speed-detecting automatic
door lock function

Off

Opening
driver's door
unlocks all
doors

Off

—

Shifting gears
to P unlocks all
doors.

Off

Shifting gears
to position
other than P
locks all doors.

Off

Level 3

Level 1 to 5

Function

Unlocking
using a key

Door lock
(→P. 69)

Light sensor
sensitivity

Lights
(→P. 192)

Time elapsed
before headlights automatically turn off
after doors are
closed
Daytime running light system (except
Canada)

0 second
30 seconds

60 seconds

90 seconds

Off

501

Vehicle specifications

Automatic
light control system
(→P. 192)

6-2. Customization

Item

Function

Default setting

Customized
setting
Off

Time elapsed
before lights
turn off

15 seconds

7.5 seconds

—

30 seconds

Illumination
(→P. 286)

Seat belt
reminder
(→P. 416)

Automatic
air conditioning system
(→P. 232)

502

Operation
when the doors
are unlocked

Off

—

Operation after
the “POWER”
switch turned
OFF

Off

—

Operation
when you
approach the
vehicle with the
electronic key
on your person

Off

—

Vehicle speed
linked seat belt
reminder
buzzer

Off

—

Switching
between outside air and
recirculated air
mode linked to
“AUTO” switch
operation

Auto

Manual

—

A/C auto switch
operation

Auto

Manual

—

Air conditioning control of
Eco drive mode

Off

—

6-2. Customization

Item

Power window
(driver’s
door) &
moon roof*
(→P. 97,
100)

Moon roof*
(→P. 100)

Default setting

Customized
setting

Key linked
opening

Off

—

Wireless
remote control
linked opening

Off

—

Key linked closing

Off

—

Wireless
remote control
linked opening
buzzer

Off

—

Linked operation of components when
door key is
used

Slide only

Tilt only

—

Linked operation of components when
wireless
remote control
is used

Slide only

Tilt only

—

Function

*: If equipped

Vehicle specifications
503

6-3. Initialization

Items to initialize
The following items must be initialized for normal system operation
after such cases as the 12-volt battery being reconnected, or maintenance being performed on the vehicle:

Item

When to initialize

Reference

Maintenance data

After the maintenance is performed

P. 338

Tire pressure warning
system (U.S.A. only)

• When changing tire pressure (such
as when changing traveling speed,
load weight, etc.)
• When changing the tire size

P. 369

504

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
in addition to notifying Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll-free:
1-800-331-4331).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your
dealer, or Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA,
1200 New Jersey Ave, S.E., Washington, DC 20590. You can
also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.

506

Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French)
The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions
extracted from the seat belt section in this manual.

See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in
English.

Utilisation correcte des ceintures de sécurité
● Tendez la sangle diagonale de
sorte
qu'elle
couvre
complètement l'épaule, sans
entrer en contact avec le cou
ou glisser de l'épaule.
● Placez la sangle abdominale
le plus bas possible sur les
hanches.
● Réglez la position du dossier
de siège. Asseyez-vous le dos
le plus droit possible et calezvous bien dans le siège.
● Ne vrillez pas la ceinture de
sécurité.

For owners
507

■ Ceinture de sécurité arrière
Si la ceinture de sécurité est sortie de son
guide, repassez-la dedans avant de
l'utiliser.

Entretien et soin
■ Ceintures de sécurité
Nettoyez avec un chiffon ou une éponge humectée d'eau savonneuse tiède.
Profitez de l'occasion pour vérifier régulièrement que les ceintures ne sont
pas effilochées, entaillées, ou ne paraissent pas exagérément usées.

ATTENTION
■ Détérioration et usure des ceintures de sécurité
Inspectez les ceintures de sécurité périodiquement. Contrôlez qu'elles ne
sont pas entaillées, effilochées, et que leurs ancrages ne sont pas
desserrés. N'utilisez pas une ceinture de sécurité défectueuse avant qu'elle
ne soit remplacée. Une ceinture de sécurité défectueuse n'apporte aucune
garantie de protection de l'occupant en cas d'accident.

508

SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French)
The following is a French explanation of SRS airbag instructions
extracted from the SRS airbag section in this manual.
See the SRS airbag section for more detailed SRS airbag instructions in English.

Sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS frontaux
Sac de sécurité gonflable conducteur/sac de sécurité gonflable
passager avant SRS
Participent à la protection de la tête et du thorax du conducteur
et du passager avant contre les chocs avec les éléments de
l'habitacle
Sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS de genoux
Participent à la protection du conducteur et du passager avant

For owners
509

Sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS latéraux et rideau
Sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS latéraux avant
Participent à la protection du haut du corps des occupants assis
aux places avant
Sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS latéraux arrière
Participent à la protection du haut du corps des occupants assis
aux places arrière extérieures
Sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS rideau
Participent principalement à la protection de la tête des
occupants assis aux places extérieures

510

Composition du système de sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS

Capteurs d'impact avant
Système de classification
des occupants du siège
passager avant (ECU et
capteurs)

Témoins indicateurs “AIR
BAG ON” et “AIR BAG
OFF”
Témoin d'alerte SRS
Contacteur de boucle de
ceinture
de
sécurité
passager avant

Capteurs d'impact latéral
(porte avant)

Boîtier électronique de sacs
de sécurité gonflables

Capteurs d'impact latéral
(avant)

Capteurs d'impact latéral
(arrière)

Sac de sécurité gonflable
passager avant

Sac de sécurité gonflable
conducteur

Sacs de sécurité gonflables
latéraux avant

Contacteur de boucle de
ceinture
de
sécurité
conducteur

Sacs de sécurité gonflables
rideau
Sacs de sécurité gonflables
latéraux arrière

For owners

Sac de sécurité gonflable
de genoux

Prétensionneurs
de
ceintures de sécurité et
limiteurs de force
511

Votre véhicule est équipé de SACS DE SECURITE GONFLABLES
INTELLIGENTS (ADVANCED AIRBAGS) conçus selon les normes
de sécurité américaines applicables aux véhicules à moteur
(FMVSS208). Le boîtier électronique (ECU) des sacs de sécurité
gonflables régule le déploiement de ces derniers sur la base des
informations qu'il reçoit des capteurs, etc., indiqués ci-dessus dans le
schéma illustrant la composition du système. Parmi ces informations
figurent la gravité du choc et l'occupation du véhicule par les
passagers. Le déploiement rapide des sacs de sécurité gonflables
est obtenu au moyen d'une réaction chimique dans les dispositifs
pyrotechniques, qui produit un gaz inoffensif permettant d'amortir le
mouvement des occupants.

512

ATTENTION
■ Précautions avec les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS
Respectez les précautions suivantes concernant les sacs de sécurité
gonflables SRS.
À défaut, des blessures graves, voire mortelles, pourraient s'ensuivre.
● Le conducteur et tous les passagers à bord du véhicule doivent porter leur
ceinture de sécurité correctement.
Les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS sont des dispositifs de protection
complémentaires aux ceintures de sécurité.
● Le sac de sécurité gonflable SRS conducteur se déploie avec une
violence considérable, qui peut être très dangereuse voire mortelle si le
conducteur se trouve très près du sac de sécurité gonflable.
L'autorité fédérale chargée de la sécurité routière aux États-Unis, la
NHTSA (National Highway Traffic Safety Administration) conseille:
Sachant que la zone à risque du sac de sécurité gonflable conducteur se
trouve dans les premiers 2 à 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) de déploiement, vous
disposez d'une marge de sécurité confortable en vous plaçant à 10 in.
(250 mm) de votre sac de sécurité gonflable conducteur. Cette distance
est à mesurer entre le moyeu du volant de direction et le sternum. Si vous
êtes assis à moins de 10 in. (250 mm), vous pouvez changer votre
position de conduite de plusieurs façons:

513

For owners

• Reculez votre siège le plus possible, tout en continuant à pouvoir
atteindre confortablement les pédales.
• Inclinez légèrement le dossier du siège.
Bien que les véhicules puissent être différents les uns des autres, la
plupart des conducteurs peuvent s'asseoir à une distance de 10 in.
(250 mm), même avec le siège conducteur complètement avancé,
simplement en inclinant un peu le dossier de siège. Si vous avez des
difficultés à voir la route après avoir incliné votre siège, utilisez un
coussin ferme et antidérapant pour vous rehausser ou, si votre
véhicule est équipé du réglage en hauteur du siège, remontez-le.
• Si votre volant de direction est réglable, inclinez-le vers le bas. Cela a
pour effet d'orienter le sac de sécurité gonflable en direction de votre
poitrine plutôt que de votre tête et de votre cou.
Réglez votre siège selon ces recommandations de la NHTSA, tout en
conservant le contrôle des pédales et du volant de direction, et la vue des
commandes du tableau de bord.

ATTENTION
■ Précautions avec les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS
●Si vous attachez une rallonge de
ceinture de sécurité aux boucles de
ceinture de sécurité avant, mais pas au
pêne de la ceinture de sécurité, les
sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS
frontaux détectent que le conducteur et
le passager avant ont attaché leur
ceinture de sécurité, alors même que
ce n'est pas le cas. Dans ce cas, il se
peut que les sacs de sécurité
gonflables SRS frontaux ne se
déploient pas correctement en cas
d'accident, et vous risquez d'être tué ou
grièvement blessé. Veillez donc à
porter la ceinture de sécurité avec la
rallonge de ceinture de sécurité.
● Le sac de sécurité gonflable SRS passager avant se déploie également
avec une violence considérable, qui peut être très dangereuse voire
mortelle si le passager avant se trouve très près du sac de sécurité
gonflable. Éloignez le siège passager avant au maximum du sac de
sécurité gonflable, et réglez le dossier de siège de sorte à être assis bien
droit dans le siège.
● Les nourrissons et les enfants qui ne sont pas correctement assis et/ou
protégés peuvent être grièvement blessés ou tués par le déploiement d'un
sac de sécurité gonflable. Installez dans un siège de sécurité enfant les
enfants trop jeunes pour pouvoir utiliser la ceinture de sécurité. Toyota
recommande vivement que les nourrissons et les jeunes enfants soient
installés sur le siège arrière du véhicule et convenablement attachés. Les
sièges arrière sont plus sûrs pour les nourrissons et les enfants que le
siège passager avant.

514

ATTENTION
■ Précautions avec les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS
● N'installez jamais un siège de sécurité enfant type dos à la route sur le
siège passager avant, même si le témoin indicateur “AIR BAG OFF” est
allumé. En cas d'accident, par la violence et la vitesse de son
déploiement, le sac de sécurité gonflable passager avant peut blesser
grièvement, voire tuer l'enfant si vous l'avez installé à la place du passager
avant dans un siège de sécurité enfant type dos à la route.
● Ne pas s'asseoir sur le bord du siège et
ne pas s'appuyer contre la planche de
bord.

● Ne laissez pas un enfant rester debout
devant le sac de sécurité gonflable
SRS passager avant ou bien s'asseoir
sur les genoux du passager avant.
● Ne laissez pas les occupants des
sièges avant voyager avec un objet sur
les genoux.
● Ne vous appuyez pas contre la porte,
contre le rail latéral de toit ou contre les
montants avant, latéraux et arrière.

For owners
515

ATTENTION
■ Précautions avec les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS
●Interdisez à quiconque de s'agenouiller
sur les sièges passagers en appui
contre la porte ou de sortir la tête ou les
mains à l'extérieur du véhicule.

●Ne fixez ni ne posez aucun objet sur la
planche de bord, la garniture centrale
du moyeu de volant de direction et la
partie inférieure du tableau de bord.
Au déploiement des sacs de sécurité
gonflables SRS conducteur, passager
avant et genoux, tout objet risque de se
transformer en projectile.
●Ne rien fixer aux portes, à la vitre de
pare-brise, aux vitres latérales, aux
montants avant et arrière, au rail latéral
de toit et à la poignée de maintien.

516

ATTENTION
■ Précautions avec les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS
● Ne suspendez aux crochets à vêtements aucun cintre nu ni aucun objet
dur. En cas de déploiement des sacs de sécurité gonflables rideau SRS,
tous ces objets pourraient se transformer en projectiles et causer des
blessures graves, voire mortelles.
● Si une housse en vinyle recouvre la partie où le sac de sécurité gonflable
SRS de genoux se déploie, veillez à l'enlever.
● N'utilisez aucun accessoire de siège venant recouvrir les zones de
déploiement des sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS latéraux, car il risquerait
d'en gêner le déploiement. De tels accessoires peuvent empêcher les
sacs de sécurité gonflables latéraux de fonctionner correctement,
désactiver le dispositif ou entraîner le déploiement accidentel des sacs de
sécurité latéraux, entraînant la mort ou des blessures graves.
● Évitez de faire subir des chocs ou des pressions excessives aux zones
renfermant les composants des sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS.
En effet, cela pourrait entraîner un fonctionnement anormal des sacs de
sécurité gonflables SRS.
● Ne touchez aucun composant du système immédiatement après le
déclenchement (déploiement) des sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS, car ils
sont alors encore très chauds.
● Si vous avez des difficultés à respirer après le déploiement des sacs de
sécurité gonflables SRS, ouvrez une porte ou une vitre pour faire entrer de
l'air frais, ou bien descendez du véhicule si cela ne présente pas de
danger. Essuyez tout résidu dès que possible afin d'éviter d'éventuelles
irritations de la peau.
● Si les parties renfermant les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS, telles que la
garniture du moyeu de volant et les garnitures de montants avant et
arrière, apparaissent abîmées ou craquelées, faites-les remplacer par
votre concessionnaire Toyota.

For owners
517

ATTENTION
■ Modification et mise au rebut des éléments du système de sacs de
sécurité gonflables SRS
Consultez impérativement votre concessionnaire Toyota si vous avez besoin
d'intervenir sur votre véhicule ou de procéder à l'une des modifications
suivantes. Les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS risquent de ne pas
fonctionner correctement ou de se déployer (gonfler) accidentellement,
provoquant ainsi des blessures graves, voire mortelles.
● Installation, dépose, démontage et réparations des sacs de sécurité
gonflables SRS
● Réparations, modifications, démontage ou remplacement du volant, du
tableau de bord, de la planche de bord, des sièges ou de leur garnissage,
des montants avant, latéraux et arrière ou des rails latéraux de toit
● Réparations ou modifications des ailes avant, du bouclier avant, ou des
flancs de l'habitacle
● Installation de chasse-neige, de treuils, etc., sur la calandre (pare-buffle
ou pare-kangourou, etc.)
● Modification des suspensions du véhicule
● Installation d'appareils électroniques, tels qu'un radioémetteur/récepteur
ou d'un lecteur CD
● Aménagements du véhicule visant à permettre sa conduite par une
personne atteinte d'un handicap physique

518

What to do if...

What to do if...
A tire punctures

P. 442 If you have a flat tire

P. 454 If the hybrid system will not start
P. 108 Immobilizer system

The hybrid system does not
start

The shift lever cannot be
moved out

The rightmost segment of the
engine coolant temperature display flashes

P. 461

If the vehicle’s 12-volt battery is
discharged

P. 458

If the electronic key does not operate properly

P. 456

If the shift lever cannot be shifted
from P

P. 465 If your vehicle overheats

Steam can be seen coming
from under the hood

The key is lost

P. 457 If you lose your keys

The 12-volt battery runs out

P. 461

If the vehicle’s 12-volt battery is
discharged

The doors cannot be locked

P. 69

Doors

The horn begins to sound

P. 110 Alarm

533

What to do if...

The vehicle is stuck in
mud or sand

P. 469 If the vehicle becomes stuck

A warning light or indicator light
comes on

P. 413

534

If a warning light turns on or a
warning buzzer sounds...

What to do if...

■Warning lights

Brake system warning
light (red indicator)

Slip indicator light
P. 414

or
P. 413

Tire pressure warning
P. 416
system light

Brake system warning light
(yellow indicator) P. 414

Electric power steering system warning light P. 414

Charging system warnP. 414
ing light

Open door warning light

Low engine oil pressure
P. 414
warning light

Low fuel level warning
P. 416
light

Malfunction indicator
lamp

Driver’s/front passenger’s seat
belt reminder light
P. 416

P. 416

Master warning light
P. 414

SRS warning light
P. 414

ABS warning light
or
P. 414

A warning message is displayed

P. 416

High engine coolant temperature
warning light (the
rightmost segment of the engine
coolant temperature display
flashes)
P. 414

P. 423 If a warning message is displayed

535

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Author                          : 129647
Create Date                     : 2013:04:29 08:37:43-04:00
Modify Date                     : 2013:04:29 08:37:43-04:00
Title                           : 
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c005 78.147326, 2012/08/23-13:03:03
Metadata Date                   : 2013:04:29 08:37:43-04:00
Creator Tool                    : FrameMaker 7.1
Format                          : application/pdf
Creator                         : 129647
Document ID                     : uuid:b68fc02c-d5fb-4619-bdaf-b9658aeb78a9
Instance ID                     : uuid:b793e3b6-c522-498d-8e5a-4943de78e3d4
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 6.0 (Windows)
Page Count                      : 497

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Toyota 2012 Camry Hybrid Owners Manual

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation